US10980459B2 - Method for non-invasive monitoring of fluorescent tracer agent with diffuse reflection corrections - Google Patents

Method for non-invasive monitoring of fluorescent tracer agent with diffuse reflection corrections Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US10980459B2
US10980459B2 US16/717,436 US201916717436A US10980459B2 US 10980459 B2 US10980459 B2 US 10980459B2 US 201916717436 A US201916717436 A US 201916717436A US 10980459 B2 US10980459 B2 US 10980459B2
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
light
signal
detector
patient
wavelength
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Active
Application number
US16/717,436
Other versions
US20200138352A1 (en
Inventor
Kimberly Shultz
Jennifer Keating
Edward Solomon
Kate Bechtel
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Medibeacon Inc
Original Assignee
Medibeacon Inc
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Medibeacon Inc filed Critical Medibeacon Inc
Priority to US16/717,436 priority Critical patent/US10980459B2/en
Publication of US20200138352A1 publication Critical patent/US20200138352A1/en
Priority to US17/000,820 priority patent/US10952656B2/en
Assigned to MEDIBEACON INC. reassignment MEDIBEACON INC. ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: BECHTEL, KATE, Shultz, Kimberly, KEATING, Jennifer, SOLOMON, Edward
Priority to US17/200,381 priority patent/US11478172B2/en
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of US10980459B2 publication Critical patent/US10980459B2/en
Priority to US17/932,713 priority patent/US11950907B2/en
Priority to US18/583,363 priority patent/US20240237928A1/en
Active legal-status Critical Current
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical

Links

Images

Classifications

    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61BDIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
    • A61B5/00Measuring for diagnostic purposes; Identification of persons
    • A61B5/20Measuring for diagnostic purposes; Identification of persons for measuring urological functions restricted to the evaluation of the urinary system
    • A61B5/201Assessing renal or kidney functions
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61BDIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
    • A61B5/00Measuring for diagnostic purposes; Identification of persons
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61BDIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
    • A61B5/00Measuring for diagnostic purposes; Identification of persons
    • A61B5/0059Measuring for diagnostic purposes; Identification of persons using light, e.g. diagnosis by transillumination, diascopy, fluorescence
    • A61B5/0071Measuring for diagnostic purposes; Identification of persons using light, e.g. diagnosis by transillumination, diascopy, fluorescence by measuring fluorescence emission
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61BDIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
    • A61B5/00Measuring for diagnostic purposes; Identification of persons
    • A61B5/145Measuring characteristics of blood in vivo, e.g. gas concentration, pH value; Measuring characteristics of body fluids or tissues, e.g. interstitial fluid, cerebral tissue
    • A61B5/1455Measuring characteristics of blood in vivo, e.g. gas concentration, pH value; Measuring characteristics of body fluids or tissues, e.g. interstitial fluid, cerebral tissue using optical sensors, e.g. spectral photometrical oximeters
    • A61B5/14551Measuring characteristics of blood in vivo, e.g. gas concentration, pH value; Measuring characteristics of body fluids or tissues, e.g. interstitial fluid, cerebral tissue using optical sensors, e.g. spectral photometrical oximeters for measuring blood gases
    • A61B5/14556Measuring characteristics of blood in vivo, e.g. gas concentration, pH value; Measuring characteristics of body fluids or tissues, e.g. interstitial fluid, cerebral tissue using optical sensors, e.g. spectral photometrical oximeters for measuring blood gases by fluorescence
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61BDIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
    • A61B5/00Measuring for diagnostic purposes; Identification of persons
    • A61B5/68Arrangements of detecting, measuring or recording means, e.g. sensors, in relation to patient
    • A61B5/6801Arrangements of detecting, measuring or recording means, e.g. sensors, in relation to patient specially adapted to be attached to or worn on the body surface
    • A61B5/683Means for maintaining contact with the body
    • A61B5/6832Means for maintaining contact with the body using adhesives
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61BDIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
    • A61B5/00Measuring for diagnostic purposes; Identification of persons
    • A61B5/72Signal processing specially adapted for physiological signals or for diagnostic purposes
    • A61B5/7203Signal processing specially adapted for physiological signals or for diagnostic purposes for noise prevention, reduction or removal
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61BDIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
    • A61B5/00Measuring for diagnostic purposes; Identification of persons
    • A61B5/72Signal processing specially adapted for physiological signals or for diagnostic purposes
    • A61B5/7235Details of waveform analysis
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61BDIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
    • A61B5/00Measuring for diagnostic purposes; Identification of persons
    • A61B5/74Details of notification to user or communication with user or patient ; user input means
    • A61B5/742Details of notification to user or communication with user or patient ; user input means using visual displays
    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01JMEASUREMENT OF INTENSITY, VELOCITY, SPECTRAL CONTENT, POLARISATION, PHASE OR PULSE CHARACTERISTICS OF INFRARED, VISIBLE OR ULTRAVIOLET LIGHT; COLORIMETRY; RADIATION PYROMETRY
    • G01J1/00Photometry, e.g. photographic exposure meter
    • G01J1/02Details
    • G01J1/04Optical or mechanical part supplementary adjustable parts
    • G01J1/0407Optical elements not provided otherwise, e.g. manifolds, windows, holograms, gratings
    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01JMEASUREMENT OF INTENSITY, VELOCITY, SPECTRAL CONTENT, POLARISATION, PHASE OR PULSE CHARACTERISTICS OF INFRARED, VISIBLE OR ULTRAVIOLET LIGHT; COLORIMETRY; RADIATION PYROMETRY
    • G01J1/00Photometry, e.g. photographic exposure meter
    • G01J1/42Photometry, e.g. photographic exposure meter using electric radiation detectors
    • G01J1/44Electric circuits
    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01JMEASUREMENT OF INTENSITY, VELOCITY, SPECTRAL CONTENT, POLARISATION, PHASE OR PULSE CHARACTERISTICS OF INFRARED, VISIBLE OR ULTRAVIOLET LIGHT; COLORIMETRY; RADIATION PYROMETRY
    • G01J3/00Spectrometry; Spectrophotometry; Monochromators; Measuring colours
    • G01J3/02Details
    • G01J3/0205Optical elements not provided otherwise, e.g. optical manifolds, diffusers, windows
    • G01J3/0208Optical elements not provided otherwise, e.g. optical manifolds, diffusers, windows using focussing or collimating elements, e.g. lenses or mirrors; performing aberration correction
    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01JMEASUREMENT OF INTENSITY, VELOCITY, SPECTRAL CONTENT, POLARISATION, PHASE OR PULSE CHARACTERISTICS OF INFRARED, VISIBLE OR ULTRAVIOLET LIGHT; COLORIMETRY; RADIATION PYROMETRY
    • G01J3/00Spectrometry; Spectrophotometry; Monochromators; Measuring colours
    • G01J3/02Details
    • G01J3/0205Optical elements not provided otherwise, e.g. optical manifolds, diffusers, windows
    • G01J3/0224Optical elements not provided otherwise, e.g. optical manifolds, diffusers, windows using polarising or depolarising elements
    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01JMEASUREMENT OF INTENSITY, VELOCITY, SPECTRAL CONTENT, POLARISATION, PHASE OR PULSE CHARACTERISTICS OF INFRARED, VISIBLE OR ULTRAVIOLET LIGHT; COLORIMETRY; RADIATION PYROMETRY
    • G01J3/00Spectrometry; Spectrophotometry; Monochromators; Measuring colours
    • G01J3/02Details
    • G01J3/0205Optical elements not provided otherwise, e.g. optical manifolds, diffusers, windows
    • G01J3/0237Adjustable, e.g. focussing
    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01JMEASUREMENT OF INTENSITY, VELOCITY, SPECTRAL CONTENT, POLARISATION, PHASE OR PULSE CHARACTERISTICS OF INFRARED, VISIBLE OR ULTRAVIOLET LIGHT; COLORIMETRY; RADIATION PYROMETRY
    • G01J3/00Spectrometry; Spectrophotometry; Monochromators; Measuring colours
    • G01J3/12Generating the spectrum; Monochromators
    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01JMEASUREMENT OF INTENSITY, VELOCITY, SPECTRAL CONTENT, POLARISATION, PHASE OR PULSE CHARACTERISTICS OF INFRARED, VISIBLE OR ULTRAVIOLET LIGHT; COLORIMETRY; RADIATION PYROMETRY
    • G01J3/00Spectrometry; Spectrophotometry; Monochromators; Measuring colours
    • G01J3/28Investigating the spectrum
    • G01J3/2823Imaging spectrometer
    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01JMEASUREMENT OF INTENSITY, VELOCITY, SPECTRAL CONTENT, POLARISATION, PHASE OR PULSE CHARACTERISTICS OF INFRARED, VISIBLE OR ULTRAVIOLET LIGHT; COLORIMETRY; RADIATION PYROMETRY
    • G01J3/00Spectrometry; Spectrophotometry; Monochromators; Measuring colours
    • G01J3/28Investigating the spectrum
    • G01J3/30Measuring the intensity of spectral lines directly on the spectrum itself
    • G01J3/32Investigating bands of a spectrum in sequence by a single detector
    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01JMEASUREMENT OF INTENSITY, VELOCITY, SPECTRAL CONTENT, POLARISATION, PHASE OR PULSE CHARACTERISTICS OF INFRARED, VISIBLE OR ULTRAVIOLET LIGHT; COLORIMETRY; RADIATION PYROMETRY
    • G01J3/00Spectrometry; Spectrophotometry; Monochromators; Measuring colours
    • G01J3/28Investigating the spectrum
    • G01J3/30Measuring the intensity of spectral lines directly on the spectrum itself
    • G01J3/36Investigating two or more bands of a spectrum by separate detectors
    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01JMEASUREMENT OF INTENSITY, VELOCITY, SPECTRAL CONTENT, POLARISATION, PHASE OR PULSE CHARACTERISTICS OF INFRARED, VISIBLE OR ULTRAVIOLET LIGHT; COLORIMETRY; RADIATION PYROMETRY
    • G01J3/00Spectrometry; Spectrophotometry; Monochromators; Measuring colours
    • G01J3/46Measurement of colour; Colour measuring devices, e.g. colorimeters
    • G01J3/50Measurement of colour; Colour measuring devices, e.g. colorimeters using electric radiation detectors
    • G01J3/51Measurement of colour; Colour measuring devices, e.g. colorimeters using electric radiation detectors using colour filters
    • G01J3/513Measurement of colour; Colour measuring devices, e.g. colorimeters using electric radiation detectors using colour filters having fixed filter-detector pairs
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61BDIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
    • A61B2560/00Constructional details of operational features of apparatus; Accessories for medical measuring apparatus
    • A61B2560/02Operational features
    • A61B2560/0242Operational features adapted to measure environmental factors, e.g. temperature, pollution
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61BDIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
    • A61B2562/00Details of sensors; Constructional details of sensor housings or probes; Accessories for sensors
    • A61B2562/02Details of sensors specially adapted for in-vivo measurements
    • A61B2562/0233Special features of optical sensors or probes classified in A61B5/00
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61BDIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
    • A61B2562/00Details of sensors; Constructional details of sensor housings or probes; Accessories for sensors
    • A61B2562/02Details of sensors specially adapted for in-vivo measurements
    • A61B2562/0233Special features of optical sensors or probes classified in A61B5/00
    • A61B2562/0242Special features of optical sensors or probes classified in A61B5/00 for varying or adjusting the optical path length in the tissue
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61BDIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
    • A61B2562/00Details of sensors; Constructional details of sensor housings or probes; Accessories for sensors
    • A61B2562/02Details of sensors specially adapted for in-vivo measurements
    • A61B2562/0271Thermal or temperature sensors
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61BDIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
    • A61B2562/00Details of sensors; Constructional details of sensor housings or probes; Accessories for sensors
    • A61B2562/16Details of sensor housings or probes; Details of structural supports for sensors
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61BDIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
    • A61B5/00Measuring for diagnostic purposes; Identification of persons
    • A61B5/72Signal processing specially adapted for physiological signals or for diagnostic purposes
    • A61B5/7235Details of waveform analysis
    • A61B5/7264Classification of physiological signals or data, e.g. using neural networks, statistical classifiers, expert systems or fuzzy systems
    • A61B5/7267Classification of physiological signals or data, e.g. using neural networks, statistical classifiers, expert systems or fuzzy systems involving training the classification device
    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01JMEASUREMENT OF INTENSITY, VELOCITY, SPECTRAL CONTENT, POLARISATION, PHASE OR PULSE CHARACTERISTICS OF INFRARED, VISIBLE OR ULTRAVIOLET LIGHT; COLORIMETRY; RADIATION PYROMETRY
    • G01J3/00Spectrometry; Spectrophotometry; Monochromators; Measuring colours
    • G01J3/12Generating the spectrum; Monochromators
    • G01J2003/1213Filters in general, e.g. dichroic, band
    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01JMEASUREMENT OF INTENSITY, VELOCITY, SPECTRAL CONTENT, POLARISATION, PHASE OR PULSE CHARACTERISTICS OF INFRARED, VISIBLE OR ULTRAVIOLET LIGHT; COLORIMETRY; RADIATION PYROMETRY
    • G01J3/00Spectrometry; Spectrophotometry; Monochromators; Measuring colours
    • G01J3/28Investigating the spectrum
    • G01J3/2823Imaging spectrometer
    • G01J2003/2826Multispectral imaging, e.g. filter imaging
    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01JMEASUREMENT OF INTENSITY, VELOCITY, SPECTRAL CONTENT, POLARISATION, PHASE OR PULSE CHARACTERISTICS OF INFRARED, VISIBLE OR ULTRAVIOLET LIGHT; COLORIMETRY; RADIATION PYROMETRY
    • G01J3/00Spectrometry; Spectrophotometry; Monochromators; Measuring colours
    • G01J3/46Measurement of colour; Colour measuring devices, e.g. colorimeters
    • G01J3/50Measurement of colour; Colour measuring devices, e.g. colorimeters using electric radiation detectors
    • G01J3/51Measurement of colour; Colour measuring devices, e.g. colorimeters using electric radiation detectors using colour filters
    • G01J3/513Measurement of colour; Colour measuring devices, e.g. colorimeters using electric radiation detectors using colour filters having fixed filter-detector pairs
    • G01J2003/516Measurement of colour; Colour measuring devices, e.g. colorimeters using electric radiation detectors using colour filters having fixed filter-detector pairs with several stacked filters or stacked filter-detector pairs

Definitions

  • the present disclosure relates generally to methods for non-invasive monitoring of a fluorescent tracer agent within a medium characterized by scattering and/or absorption of light. More particularly, the present disclosure relates to methods for non-invasive assessment of kidney function by monitoring the clearance of an exogenous fluorescent tracer within the tissues of a patient in vivo.
  • Dynamic monitoring of renal function in patients at the bedside in real time is highly desirable in order to minimize the risk of acute renal failure brought on by various clinical, physiological and pathological conditions. It is particularly important in the case of critically ill or injured patients because a large percentage of these patients face the risk of multiple organ failure (MOF) incited by one or more severe dysfunctions, such as: acute lung injury (ALI), adult respiratory distress syndrome (ARDS), hypermetabolism, hypotension, persistent inflammation, and/or sepsis. Renal function may also be impaired due to kidney damage associated with administration of nephrotoxic drugs as part of a procedure such as angiography, diabetes, auto-immune disease, and other dysfunctions and/or insults causally linked to kidney damage.
  • ALI acute lung injury
  • ARDS adult respiratory distress syndrome
  • hypermetabolism hypotension
  • hypotension persistent inflammation
  • sepsis sepsis
  • Renal function may also be impaired due to kidney damage associated with administration of nephrotoxic drugs as part of a procedure such as angiography,
  • Serum creatinine concentration an endogenous marker of renal function
  • GFR glomerular filtration rate
  • creatinine-based assessments of renal function may be prone to inaccuracies due to many potential factors, including: age, state of hydration, renal perfusion, muscle mass, dietary intake, and many other anthropometric and clinical variables.
  • a series of creatinine-based equations (most recently extended to cystatin C) have been developed which incorporate factors such as sex, race and other relevant factors for the estimation of glomerular filtration rate (eGFR) based on serum creatinine measurements.
  • these eGFR equations are not provided with any means of compensating for most of the above sources of variance, and therefore have relatively poor accuracy.
  • the eGFR method typically yields results that lag behind true GFR by up to 72 hrs.
  • Exogenous marker compounds such as inulin, iothalamate, 51 Cr-EDTA, Gd-DTPA and 99m Tc-DTPA have been used in existing methods for measuring GFR.
  • Other endogenous markers such as 123 I and 125 I labeled o-iodohippurate or 99m Tc-MAG3 have been used to in other existing methods for assessing the tubular secretion process.
  • the use of typical exogenous marker compounds may be accompanied by various undesirable effects including the introduction of radioactive materials and/or ionizing radiation into the patient, and laborious ex vivo handling of blood and urine samples, rendering existing methods using these exogenous markers unsuitable for real-time monitoring of renal function at a patient's bedside.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic illustration of a single-wavelength renal monitoring device in one aspect
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic illustration of a dual-wavelength renal monitoring system in one aspect
  • FIG. 3 is a graph summarizing the absorption, transmission, and emission spectra of various devices, materials, and compounds associated with the non-invasive monitoring of an exogenous fluorescent agent in vivo defined over light wavelengths ranging from about 430 nm to about 650 nm;
  • FIG. 4 is a graph summarizing the absorption spectra of oxyhemoglobin (HbO 2 ) and deoxyhemoglobin (Hb) defined over light wavelengths ranging from about 200 nm to about 650 nm;
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic illustration of the timing of light pulse cycles associated with data acquisition by a dual-wavelength renal monitoring system in one aspect, in which each light pulse cycle includes light pulses produced at the excitation wavelength and at the emission wavelength in sequence;
  • FIG. 6 is a side view of a sensor head of a renal function monitoring system in one aspect
  • FIG. 7 is a bottom view of the sensor head of FIG. 6 ;
  • FIG. 8 is a top interior view of the sensor head of FIG. 6 illustrating an arrangement of various electrical components within a housing of a sensor head of a renal function monitoring system in one aspect;
  • FIG. 9 is an enlargement of the interior view of FIG. 8 ;
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic illustration of the apertures formed within a contact surface of a sensor head of a renal function monitoring system in one aspect
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic illustration of synchronous detection of light by a light detector of a sensor head in one aspect
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic illustration of light signal modulation and demodulation by the sensor head in one aspect
  • FIG. 13 is a block diagram illustrating the subunits of a processing unit in one aspect
  • FIG. 14A is a flow chart illustrating the steps of a global error mapping method of determining the parameters of a diffuse reflectance correction equation in one aspect
  • FIG. 14B is a flow chart illustrating the steps of a global error mapping method of determining the parameters of a diffuse reflectance correction equation in a second aspect
  • FIG. 15A is a graph of representative intrinsic fluorescence measurements of the fluorescent agent (IF agent ) detected by a renal monitoring device obtained before and after injection of an exogenous fluorescent agent. A subset of the data selected for analysis to determine correction factors are shown highlighted in orange.
  • FIG. 15B is a graph of representative intrinsic fluorescence measurements of the fluorescent agent (IF agent ) detected by a renal monitoring device obtained before and after injection of an exogenous fluorescent agent. A subset of the data selected for analysis by fitting the IF agent to a plasma-derived IF agent to determine correction factors are shown highlighted in orange.
  • FIG. 16 is a graph comparing the log-transformed single-exponential curve fit of the corrected fluorescence signal measurements (log[Fit], black dashed line) and the corrected fluorescence signal measurements from FIG. 15 (IF agent , red line) over a portion of the selected analysis region from FIG. 15 .
  • FIG. 17 is a map of a representative error surface summarizing normalized root-mean-square errors (RMSE, color scale) calculated for the difference between the linear fit to the log of the fluorescence and the corrected fluorescence signal measurements for a range of correction factors k ex and k em,filtered , with a minimum RSME region identified by a white arrow overlaid on the map;
  • RMSE normalized root-mean-square errors
  • FIG. 18 is a graph comparing raw (F, blue line) fluorescence signal measurements and corrected (IF, red line) fluorescence signal measurements obtained before and after injection of an exogenous fluorescent agent.
  • FIG. 19 is a flow chart summarizing the steps of a linear regression model method of determining the parameters of a diffuse reflectance correction equation in one aspect
  • FIG. 20 is a graph of log-transformed raw fluorescence signal (Log(Flr)) showing the regions of the data used as project fits for: a linear regression model used to develop a data correction algorithm (orange line), the response variable for the linear regression model (black dashed line), and the region of highly varying data used to train the linear regression model (blue line);
  • FIG. 21A is a graph of raw fluorescence signal measurements obtained before and after injection of an exogenous fluorescent agent. Measurements of raw fluorescence signals were obtained during exposure to various perturbations denoted as colored regions starting at about 13:50 hours. The various perturbations included variations in blood oxygenation in the test subject, application and removal of pressure to the measured region, administration of blood pressure medication to the test subject, cooling of the measured region, and removal/replacement of the sensor head of the device;
  • FIG. 21B is a graph of corrected fluorescence signal measurements of FIG. 21A ;
  • FIG. 21C is a graph of diffuse reflectance signal measurements measured simultaneously with the raw fluorescence signal measurements of FIG. 21A . These signals are used in the correction of the raw fluorescence signal measurements of FIG. 21A to produce the corrected signal shown in FIG. 21B ;
  • FIG. 22A is a block diagram illustrating a plurality of modules of a pre-processing subunit in one aspect
  • FIG. 22B is a block diagram illustrating a plurality of modules of a pre-processing subunit in a second aspect
  • FIG. 23 is an isometric view of a sensor head of a renal function monitoring system in a second aspect
  • FIG. 24 is a bottom view of the sensor head of a renal function monitoring system illustrated in FIG. 23 ;
  • FIG. 25 is an isometric view of the sensor head of a renal function monitoring system illustrated in FIG. 23 with the upper housing and various electrical components removed to expose an inner housing;
  • FIG. 26 is an exploded view of the inner housing of the sensor head illustrated in FIG. 25 .
  • a sample refers to a single, discrete data value acquired from a signal and/or telemetry analog-to-digital converter (ADC) for a single acquisition/telemetry channel.
  • ADC analog-to-digital converter
  • a measured value refers to a single, discrete data value created by demodulating or accumulating a sequence of samples from one acquisition channel.
  • a measurement refers to a set comprising the Demodulated In-Phase, Demodulated Out-of-Phase, and Averaged measurement values from one acquisition channel.
  • a measurement subset refers to a set comprising all measurements for all acquisition channels during a single source LED illumination.
  • all measurements of an acquisition channel may include demodulated in-phase, demodulated out-of-phase, and averaged measurements.
  • a measurement set refers to a set comprising one measurement subset for each source LED.
  • An acquisition refers to the overall process by which a measurement set is obtained.
  • a measurement sequence refers to a sequence of one or more measurement sets.
  • a telemetry value refers to a single, discrete data value acquired from a single channel of a telemetry ADC.
  • a telemetry set refers to a set comprising one telemetry value from each telemetry channel.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic illustration of a system 100 , provided as a non-limiting example, in which fluorescence 102 with an emission wavelength ( ⁇ em ) is detected from a region of interest of a patient 104 using a light detector 110 configured to detect only those photons with an emission wavelength ( ⁇ em ).
  • the exogenous fluorescent agent 112 produces fluorescence 102 in response to an excitation event including, but not limited to: illumination by light 106 at an excitation wavelength ( ⁇ ex ), occurrence of an enzymatic reaction, changes in local electrical potential, and any other known excitation event associated with exogenous fluorescent agents.
  • the system 100 may include a light source 108 configured to deliver light 106 at an excitation wavelength ( ⁇ ex ) to the patient 104 .
  • the fluorescence 102 is produced in response to illumination by the light 106 .
  • the excitation wavelength ( ⁇ ex ) of the light 106 and the emission wavelength ( ⁇ em ) of the fluorescence 102 are spectrally distinct (i.e., ⁇ ex is sufficiently different from ⁇ em ) so that the light detector 110 may be configured to selectively detect only the fluorescence 102 by the inclusion of any known optical wavelength separation device including, but not limited to, an optical filter.
  • changes in the fluorescence 102 may be monitored to obtain information regarding a physiological function or status of the patient.
  • the time-dependent decrease in the fluorescence 102 measured after introduction of the exogenous fluorescent agent 112 into a circulatory vessel of the patient 104 may be analyzed to obtain information regarding renal function of the patient 104 .
  • the rate of decrease in fluorescence 102 may be assumed to be proportional to the rate of removal of the exogenous fluorescent agent 112 by the kidneys of the patient 104 , thereby providing a measurement of renal function including, but not limited to: renal decay time constant (RDTC) and glomerular filtration rate (GFR).
  • RDTC renal decay time constant
  • GFR glomerular filtration rate
  • the intensity of fluorescence 102 detected by the light detector 110 may be influenced by any one or more of numerous factors including, but not limited to: the intensity or power of the light 106 at ⁇ ex delivered to the patient 104 , the scattering and absorption of the light 106 passing through intervening tissues 114 of the patient 104 between the light source 108 and the exogenous fluorescent agents 112 , the concentration of exogenous fluorescent agents 112 illuminated by the light 106 , and the scattering and absorption of the fluorescence 102 at ⁇ em passing through intervening tissues 114 of the patient 104 between the exogenous fluorescent agents 112 and the light detector 110 .
  • Existing methods typically assume that the optical properties within the intervening tissue 114 remain essentially unchanged throughout the period during which measurements are obtained by the system 100 . As a result, existing methods typically obtain initial measurements through the intervening tissue 114 of the patient 104 prior to introduction of the exogenous fluorescent agent 112 , and these initial measurements are subtracted to correct all subsequent data obtained after introduction of the exogenous fluorescent agent 112 .
  • changes in the optical properties of the intervening tissue 114 may occur due to changes in at least one characteristic including, but not limited to: optical coupling efficiency of the light detector 110 to the patient 104 ; concentration of chromophores such as hemoglobin due to changes in blood volume caused by vascular dilation, constriction, or compression; changes in the optical properties of chromophores such as hemoglobin due to changes in oxygenation status; and changes in tissue structure such as changes related to edema.
  • changes in the optical properties of the intervening tissue 114 may introduce uncertainty into long-term measurements of fluorescence 102 .
  • changes in the optical properties of the intervening tissue 114 may modulate the intensity or power of the light 106 illuminating the exogenous fluorescent agents 112 , causing a modulation of the fluorescence 102 produced by the exogenous fluorescent agents 112 that may be erroneously interpreted as a modulation in the concentration of the exogenous fluorescent agents 112 .
  • changes in the optical properties of the intervening tissue 114 may modulate the intensity or power of the fluorescence 102 reaching the light detector 110 that may also be erroneously interpreted as a modulation in the concentration of the exogenous fluorescent agents 112 .
  • the potential modulation of changes in the optical properties of the intervening tissue 114 may introduce uncertainty into measurements of fluorescence 102 , in particular those measurements associated with long-term monitoring of fluorescence 102 as described herein above.
  • a method of correcting in vivo real-time measurements of fluorescence from an exogenous fluorescent agent to remove the effects of changes in the optical properties within the tissue of the patient is provided.
  • the inclusion of an additional measurement of light passing through the tissue of the patient via a separate optical pathway (i.e. diffuse reflectance) from the optical pathway of the fluorescence measurements enhanced the quantification of changes in the optical properties of the tissue during prolonged monitoring of fluorescence from an exogenous fluorescent agent within a patient.
  • the inclusion of this additional measurement in the correction method in various aspects was discovered to significantly enhance the fidelity of fluorescence measurements, even in the presence of substantial perturbations as described herein below.
  • Non-limiting examples of EM radiation include visible light, near-IR light, IR light, UV radiation, and microwave radiation.
  • the scattering media may include any living or non-living material capable of propagating EM radiation of at least one EM frequency without limitation. At least a portion of the scattering media may further include one or more substructures or compounds capable of reflecting and/or absorbing the EM radiation.
  • Non-limiting examples of scattering media include: a tissue of a living or dead organism, such as a skin of a mammal; a gas such as air with or without additional particles such as dust, fluid droplets, or a solid particulate material; a fluid such as water with or without additional particles such as gas bubbles or a solid particulate material.
  • a tissue of a living or dead organism such as a skin of a mammal
  • a gas such as air with or without additional particles such as dust, fluid droplets, or a solid particulate material
  • a fluid such as water with or without additional particles such as gas bubbles or a solid particulate material.
  • FIG. 2 is a block diagram of a system 200 for optically monitoring renal function of a patient 202 via measurements of the fluorescence of an injected exogenous fluorescent agent in the patient 202 , in one aspect.
  • the system 200 may include at least one sensor head 204 configured to deliver light at an excitatory wavelength ( ⁇ ex ) into a first region 206 of the patient 202 .
  • the system 200 is further configured to detect light at an emission wavelength ( ⁇ em ), at a second region 208 of the patient 202 , and to detect light at the excitatory wavelength ( ⁇ ex ), and/or emission wavelength ( ⁇ em ), at a third region 210 of the patient 202 .
  • the system 200 may further include a controller 212 operatively coupled to the at least one sensor head 204 , an operation unit 214 , and a display unit 216 .
  • the controller 212 is configured to control the operation of the at least one sensor head 204 as described in additional detail herein below.
  • the controller 212 is further configured to receive measurements of light from the at least one sensor head 204 .
  • the controller 212 is further configured to correct the light measurements corresponding to fluorescence from exogenous fluorescent agents according to at least one method including, but not limited to, the disclosed methods of correcting fluorescence measurements using measurements of the diffuse reflectance of light.
  • the controller 212 is further configured to transform the fluorescence measurements received from the at least one sensor head 204 into a summary parameter representative of the renal function of the patient 202 .
  • the controller 212 is configured to receive at least one signal representing user inputs from the operation unit 214 and to generate one or more forms for display on the display unit 216 including, but not limited to, a graphical user interface (GUI).
  • GUI graphical user interface
  • the sensor head 204 includes at least one light source and at least one light detector in a housing.
  • FIG. 6 is a side view of a housing 600 for the sensor head 204 in one aspect that includes an upper housing 602 and a lower housing 604 attached together to enclose two light sources and two light detectors.
  • the bottom surface 608 of the lower housing 604 further includes a contact surface 606 configured to be attached to the skin of a patient 202 using a biocompatible adhesive material including, but not limited to, a surgical adhesive. In use, the surface of the adhesive material opposite to the contact surface 606 may be affixed to the skin of the patient 202 .
  • the adhesive material may be configured to transmit light through the light sources into the patient and to further transmit the fluorescence from the patient to the light detectors.
  • the adhesive material may be an optically transparent material.
  • the adhesive material may be produced from a non-fluorescing material to prevent the production of confounding fluorescence by the adhesive material.
  • the upper housing 602 may further include one or more openings 806 configured to provide access to the interior for a cable including, but not limited to, a USB cable, and/or to provide a window for a display generated by the circuitry contained within the housing 600 , such as an indicator LED.
  • a cable including, but not limited to, a USB cable
  • a window for a display generated by the circuitry contained within the housing 600 such as an indicator LED.
  • FIG. 7 is a bottom view of the housing 600 illustrated in FIG. 8 .
  • the contact surface 606 may include an aperture plate 702 including one or more apertures 704 configured to transmit light between the skin of the patient and the light sources and light detectors contained inside the housing 600 .
  • the aperture plate 702 may be epoxied into the lower housing 604 to prevent liquid ingress into the interior of the housing 600 .
  • the dimensions, arrangement, and/or spacing of the one or more apertures 704 may be selected to enhance various aspects of the operation of the system 200 , as described in additional detail herein below.
  • the contact surface 606 may further include a temperature sensor opening 706 configured to provide a thermal path from the skin surface of the patient to an additional temperature sensor 228 configured to monitor the temperature at the skin surface of the patient.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram illustrating the arrangement of the electrical components within the housing 600 .
  • the upper housing 602 and the lower housing 604 may be affixed together with screws 802 , and the screw holes and the interface between the two housing pieces may be filled with a water-resistant filler material 804 including, but not limited to, a silicone material such as room temperature vulcanization silicone (RTV) to inhibit liquid ingress into the interior of the housing 600 .
  • RTV room temperature vulcanization silicone
  • the housing 600 may further include a cable opening 806 formed through the upper housing 602 .
  • the cable opening 806 may be configured to provide access to the interior for an electrical cable including, but not limited to, a USB cable.
  • the cable may enable the supply of power to the light sources, light detectors, indicator lights, and associated electrical devices and circuits as described herein below.
  • the cable may further enable the communication of control signals into the housing to enable the operation of the electrical components within the housing 600
  • the cable may further enable the communication of data signals encoding measurements obtained by one of more of the sensor devices contained within the housing 600 including, but not limited to: the first light detector 222 , the second light detector 224 , any additional light detectors, such as a first monitor photodiode 904 and a second monitor diode 906 , and any additional temperature sensors 228 (see FIG. 9 ).
  • the cable may be attached to the cable opening 806 and adjacent upper housing 602 with a light absorbent adhesive including, but not limited to, black epoxy and may further be sealed against water incursion using a water resistant filler material including, but not limited to, RTV.
  • the housing 600 may further include at least one display opening 808 formed through the upper housing 602 .
  • each display opening 808 may be configured to provide a window for a display generated by the circuitry contained within the housing 600 , such as an indicator LED 810 .
  • each indicator LED 810 may be positioned on a circuit board 812 .
  • a light pipe 814 may be epoxied into the display opening 808 within the upper housing 602 above each indicator LED 810 .
  • Each a light pipe 814 may be filled with a water-resistant filler material such as RTV for liquid ingress protection.
  • the at least one indicator LED 810 may illuminate in a predetermined pattern to enable a user of the system 200 to monitor the operational status of the sensor head 204 .
  • FIG. 9 is a close-up view of the interior optical region of the sensor head 204 showing the arrangement of the light sources 218 / 220 and the light detectors 222 / 224 within the housing 600 in one aspect.
  • the light sources 218 / 220 are separated from the light detectors 222 / 224
  • the first light detector 222 is separated from the second light detector 224 are separated from one another by a sensor mount 912 affixed to the aperture plate 702 .
  • the sensor mount 912 ensures that light from the light sources 218 / 220 does not reach the light detectors 222 / 224 without coupling through the skin of the patient 202 .
  • the separation between the first light detector 222 within the first detection well 908 and the second light detector 224 within the second detection well 910 ensures that the fluorescence signal produced by the exogenous fluorescent agent within the tissues of the patient 202 is distinguishable from the unfiltered excitation light introduced by the first light source 218 .
  • the sensor mount 912 may be aligned to a circuit board (not shown) containing the light sources 218 / 220 and light detectors 222 / 224 using alignment pins 914 and held in place using screws 916 .
  • the sensor mount 912 may be affixed to the circuit board containing the light sources 218 / 220 and light detectors 222 / 224 using a light absorbent adhesive including, but not limited to, black epoxy.
  • this light-resistant join between the circuit board and the sensor mount 912 inhibits leakage of light between the light sources 218 / 220 and the light detectors 222 / 224 , and further inhibits the leakage of light between the first light detector 222 and the second light detector 224 .
  • the apertures 704 configured to transmit light to and from the skin underlying the contact surface 606 of the sensor head 204 are formed through a structurally separate aperture plate 702 (see FIG. 7 ) to provide for precise alignment of the apertures 704 to the corresponding light sources 218 / 220 and light detectors 222 / 224 , described in additional detail herein below.
  • the sensor mount 912 may further provide electrical shielding for any sensitive electrical devices within the sensor head 204 including, but not limited to, the light detectors 222 / 224 .
  • the sensor mount 912 may be constructed of an electrically conductive material including, but not limited to: aluminum and aluminum alloy.
  • the sensor mount 912 may be electrically coupled to the ground of the circuit board using conductive screws 916 .
  • any glass windows positioned within the source well 902 and/or detector wells 908 / 910 adjacent to the aperture plate 702 including, but not limited to, an optical filter 244 and clear glass 246 as described herein below (see FIG. 2 ) may further include an electrically conductive coating.
  • suitable electrically conductive coatings for the glass windows of the sensor mount include a conductive indium tin oxide (ITO) coating and any other suitable transparent and electrically conductive coating.
  • ITO conductive indium tin oxide
  • the conductive material of the sensor mount 912 provides a partial Faraday cage to shield the electrically sensitive detectors 222 / 224 from electrical noise generated by or conducted through the patient's body.
  • the partial Faraday cage provided by the sensor mount 912 may be completed with the conductive ITO coating on the glass windows within the source well 902 and/or detector wells 908 / 910 .
  • the electrically conductive coating on the glass windows such as an ITO coating, are sufficiently conductive to provide electrical shielding while remaining sufficiently transparent for the transmission of light to and from the skin surface of the patient 202 .
  • the ITO coating of each glass window may be grounded to an electrically conductive sensor mount 912 using any known electrical grounding method including, by not limited to: a wire connecting the glass coating to the sensor mount 912 that is attached at both wire ends with conductive epoxy, or attaching the coated glass directly to a glass fitting such as a ledge or frame formed within each of the source well 902 and/or detector wells 908 / 910 using an electrically conductive epoxy.
  • the contact surface 606 of the housing 600 may be attached the patient's skin using a biocompatible and an adhesive material 610 including, but not limited to, a clear double-sided medical grade adhesive, as illustrated in FIG. 6 and FIG. 7 .
  • a biocompatible and an adhesive material 610 including, but not limited to, a clear double-sided medical grade adhesive, as illustrated in FIG. 6 and FIG. 7 .
  • the adhesive material 610 may be positioned on the contact surface 606 such that the adhesive material covers the apertures 704 , but exposes the temperature sensor opening 706 to ensure sufficient thermal contact with the skin of the patient 202 .
  • the sensor head 204 may be further secured to the patient 202 as needed using one or more additional biocompatible medical fastener devices including, but not limited to: Tegaderm bandages, medical tape, or any other suitable biocompatible medical fastener devices.
  • the contact surface 606 may be located near the front edge of the sensor head 204 to provide for accurate positioning of the contact surface 606 on a selected region of the patient's skin.
  • the apertures 704 may be positioned towards the center of the contact surface 606 to reduce ambient light ingress. Without being limited to any particular theory, ambient light may enter one or more of the apertures 704 due to incomplete adhesion of the contact surface 606 to the patient's skin and/or due to the propagation of ambient light passing through the patient's exposed skin situated just outside of the footprint of the contact surface 606 into the apertures 704 .
  • the bottom surface 608 of the sensor head 204 curves away from the plane of the contact surface 606 to enable attachment of the sensor head 204 to varied body type and locations.
  • any gap 612 between the bottom surface 608 and the skin surface of the patient 202 may be filled with a biocompatible foam to ensure consistent contact with the patient 202 .
  • each sensor head 204 includes a first light source 218 and a second light source 220 configured to deliver light to a first region 206 of a patient 202 .
  • the first light source 218 is configured to deliver the light at the excitatory wavelength and the second light source 220 is configured to deliver light at the emission wavelength.
  • the excitatory wavelength may be selected to fall within a spectral range at which the exogenous fluorescent agent exhibits relatively high absorbance.
  • the emission wavelength may be selected to fall within a spectral range at which the exogenous fluorescent agent exhibits relatively high emission.
  • the exogenous fluorescent agent may be selected for enhanced contrast relative to other chromophores within the tissues of the patient 202 including, but not limited to hemoglobin within red blood cells and/or melanin within melanocytes.
  • the exogenous fluorescent agent may be selected to conduct measurements within spectral ranges with lower variation in absorption by other chromophores such as hemoglobin within the tissues of the patient 202 during use.
  • hemoglobin (Hb) is an absorber of visible light in the tissues of the patient 202 , and has the potential to interfere with the measurements of fluorescence of the exogenous fluorescent agent if the Hb absorbance varies over the measurement period of the system 200 . Because hemoglobin (Hb) enables gas exchange within virtually all tissues containing circulatory vessels, virtually all tissues are vulnerable to interference with fluorescence measurements of the system 200 due to fluctuations in hemoglobin concentration. Within most tissues, externally applied pressure may cause blood pooling which may be manifested as an apparent decay of the fluorescence measured at the skin surface.
  • Periodic opening and closing of blood vessels (“vasomotion”) near the surface of the skin may also cause fluctuations in hemoglobin concentration which may introduce additional noise in to measurements of fluorescence of the exogenous fluorescent agent by the system 200 .
  • variation in the Hb oxygenation state may also be observed, leading to additional potential variations in the background skin absorbance due to differences in the absorption spectra of deoxyhemoglobin (Hb) and oxyhemoglobin (HbO 2 ), shown illustrated in FIG. 3 .
  • the excitation and emission wavelengths for the exogenous fluorescent agent may be selected to coincide with a pair of HbO 2 /Hb isosbestic points, each isosbestic point defined herein as a wavelength characterized by about equal light absorbance by HbO 2 and Hb.
  • fluorescence measurements conducted at each isosbestic wavelength are less sensitive to variation due to changes in the oxygenation of hemoglobin, so long as the combined concentration of HbO 2 and Hb remains relatively stable during measurements of fluorescence by the system 200 .
  • Hb/HbO 2 isosbestic wavelengths include: about 390 nm, about 422 nm, about 452 nm, about 500 nm, about 530 nm, about 538 nm, about 545 nm, about 570 nm, about 584 nm, about 617 nm, about 621 nm, about 653 nm, and about 805 nm.
  • the excitation and emission wavelengths may be selected based on the absorption and emission wavelengths of the selected exogenous fluorescent agent of the system 200 .
  • the excitatory wavelength may be an HbO 2 /Hb isosbestic wavelength and simultaneously may be a wavelength within a spectral range of high absorbance of the exogenous fluorescent agent.
  • the emission wavelength may be an HbO 2 /Hb isosbestic wavelength and simultaneously may be a wavelength within a spectral range of emission by the exogenous fluorescent agent.
  • Table 3 provides a summary of HbO2/Hb isosbestic wavelengths within the spectral range of 200 nm to about 1000 nm.
  • FIG. 4 is a graph of the absorption spectra used to identify the HbO 2 /Hb isosbestic wavelengths of Table 1.
  • FIG. 3 is a graph summarizing the absorption spectra for HbO 2 and Hb, as well as the absorption and emission spectra of frequency spectra of MB-102, an exogenous fluorescent agent in one aspect. Emission spectra for a blue LED light source and a green LED light source are also shown superimposed over the other spectra of FIG. 3 .
  • the system 200 may include a blue LED as the first light source 218 , and the excitatory wavelength for the system 200 may be the isosbestic wavelength of about 450 nm. As listed in Table 1 and shown in FIG.
  • the Hb absorbance spectra is strongly sloped at the isosbestic wavelengths of about 420 nm to about 450 nm (see columns 3 and 4 of Table 1), indicating that the relative absorbance of HbO 2 and Hb at the isosbestic wavelength of about 450 nm is sensitive to small changes in excitatory wavelength.
  • the HbO 2 /Hb spectra are less steeply sloped, and a broader band light source including, but not limited to, an LED with a bandpass filter may suffice for use as a first light source 218 .
  • the excitatory wave length may be selected to enhance the contrast in light absorbance between the exogenous fluorescent agent and the chromophores within the tissues of the patient 202 .
  • the light absorption of the MB-102 is more than three-fold higher than the light absorption of the HbO 2 and the Hb.
  • a higher proportion of light illuminating the tissue of the patient 202 at a wavelength of about 450 nm will be absorbed by the MB-102 relative to the HbO 2 and Hb, thus enhancing the efficiency of absorption by the MB-102 and reducing the intensity of light at the excitatory wavelength needed to elicit a detectable fluorescence signal.
  • a second isosbestic wavelength may also be selected as the emission wavelength for the system 200 .
  • FIG. 3 shows an emission spectrum of the MB-102 exogenous contrast agent that is characterized by an emission peak at a wavelength of about 550 nm.
  • the isosbestic wavelength of 570 nm may be selected as the emission wavelength to be detected by first and second detectors 222 / 224 .
  • the emission wavelength of the system 200 may be selected to fall within a spectral range characterized by relatively low absorbance of the chromophores within the tissues of the patient 202 . Without being limited to any particular theory, the low absorbance of the chromophores at the selected emission wavelength may reduce the losses of light emitted by the exogenous fluorescent agent and enhancing the efficiency of fluorescence detection.
  • the first light source 218 and the second light source 220 may be any light source configured to deliver light at the excitatory wavelength and at the emission wavelength.
  • the first light source 218 delivers light at an intensity that is sufficient to penetrate the tissues of the patient 202 to the exogenous fluorescent agent with sufficient intensity remaining to induce the emission of light at the emission wave length by the exogenous fluorescent agent.
  • the first light source 218 delivers light at an intensity that is sufficient to penetrate the tissues of the patient 202 to the exogenous fluorescent agent with sufficient intensity remaining after scattering and/or absorption to induce fluorescence at the emission wave length by the exogenous fluorescent agent.
  • the intensity of light delivered by the first light source 218 is limited to an upper value to prevent adverse effects such as tissue burning, cell damage, and/or photo-bleaching of the exogenous fluorescent agent and/or the endogenous chromophores in the skin (“auto-fluorescence”).
  • the second light source 220 delivers light at the emission wavelength of the exogenous fluorescent agent at an intensity configured to provide sufficient energy to propagate with scattering and absorption through the first region 206 of the patient and out the second region 208 and third region 210 with sufficient remaining intensity for detection by the first light detector 222 and the second light detector 224 , respectively.
  • the intensity of light produced by the second light source 220 is limited to an upper value to prevent the adverse effects such as tissue injury or photobleaching described previously.
  • the first light source 218 and the second light source 220 may be any light source suitable for use with fluorescent medical imaging systems and devices.
  • suitable light sources include: LEDs, diode lasers, pulsed lasers, continuous waver lasers, xenon arc lamps or mercury-vapor lamps with an excitation filter, lasers, and supercontinuum sources.
  • the first light source 218 and/or the second light source 220 may produce light at a narrow spectral bandwidth suitable for monitoring the concentration of the exogenous fluorescence agent using the method described herein.
  • the first light source 218 and the second light source 220 may produce light at a relatively wide spectral bandwidth.
  • the selection of intensity of the light produced by the first light source 218 and the second light source 220 by the system 200 may be influenced any one or more of at least several factors including, but not limited to, the maximum permissible exposure (MPE) for skin exposure to a laser beam according to applicable regulatory standards such as ANSI standard Z136.1.
  • MPE maximum permissible exposure
  • light intensity for the system 200 may be selected to reduce the likelihood of photobleaching of the exogenous fluorescent source and/or other chromophores within the tissues of the patient 202 including, but not limited to: collagen, keratin, elastin, hemoglobin within red blood cells and/or melanin within melanocytes.
  • the light intensity for the system 200 may be selected in order to elicit a detectable fluorescence signal from the exogenous fluorescent source within the tissues of the patient 202 and the first light detector 222 and/or second light detector. In yet another aspect, the light intensity for the system 200 may be selected to provide suitably high light energy while reducing power consumption, inhibiting heating/overheating of the first light source 218 and the second light source 220 , and/or reducing the exposure time of the patient's skin to light from the first light detector 222 and/or second light detector.
  • the intensity of the first light source 218 and the second light source 220 may be modulated to compensate any one or more of at least several factors including, but not limited to: individual differences in the concentration of chromophores within the patient 202 , such as variation in skin pigmentation.
  • the detection gain of the light detectors may be modulated to similarly compensate for variation in individual differences in skin properties.
  • the variation in skin pigmentation may be between two different individual patients 202 , or between two different positions on the same patient 202 .
  • the light modulation may compensate for variation in the optical pathway taken by the light through the tissues of the patient 202 .
  • the optical pathway may vary due to any one or more of at least several factors including but not limited to: variation in separation distances between the light sources and light detectors of the system 200 ; variation in the secure attachment of the sensor head 204 to the skin of the patient 202 ; variation in the light output of the light sources due to the exposure of the light sources to environmental factors such as heat and moisture; variation in the sensitivity of the light detectors due to the exposure of the light detectors to environmental factors such as heat and moisture; modulation of the duration of illumination by the light sources, and any other relevant operational parameter.
  • the first light source 218 and the second light source 220 may be configured to modulate the intensity of the light produced as needed according to any one or more of the factors described herein above.
  • the intensity of the light may be modulated electronically using methods including, but not limited to, modulation of the electrical potential, current, and/or power supplied to the first light source 218 and/or the second light source 220 .
  • the intensity of the light may be modulated using optical methods including, but not limited to: partially or fully occluding the light leaving the first light source 218 and the second light source 220 using an optical device including, but not limited to: an iris, a shutter, and/or one or more filters; diverting the path of the light leaving the first light source 218 and the second light source 220 away from the first region 206 of the patient using an optical device including, but not limited to a lenses, a mirror, and/or a prism.
  • optical methods including, but not limited to: partially or fully occluding the light leaving the first light source 218 and the second light source 220 using an optical device including, but not limited to: an iris, a shutter, and/or one or more filters; diverting the path of the light leaving the first light source 218 and the second light source 220 away from the first region 206 of the patient using an optical device including, but not limited to a lenses, a mirror, and/or a prism.
  • the intensity of the light produced by the first light source 218 and the second light source 220 may be modulated via control of the laser fluence, defined herein as the rate of energy within the produced light beam.
  • the laser fluence may be limited to ranges defined by safety standards including, but not limited to, ANSI standards for exposure to laser energy such as ANSI Z136.1.
  • the maximum fluence of light delivered to a patient 202 may be influenced by a variety of factors including, but not limited to the wavelength of the delivered light and the duration of exposure to the light.
  • the maximum fluence of light may range from about 0.003 J/cm2 for light at delivered at wavelengths of less than about 302 nm to about 1 J/cm2 for light delivered at wavelengths ranging from about 1500 nm to about 1800 nm for a duration of up to about 10 sec.
  • the maximum fluence may be about 0.6 J/cm2 for a duration of up to about 10 sec, and up to about 0.2 J/cm2 for a duration ranging from about 10 sec to about 30,000 sec.
  • the delivered light is limited to a maximum power density (W/cm2) according to ANSI standards: visible/NIR light is limited to 0.2 W/cm2 and far IR light is limited to about 0.1 W/cm2.
  • W/cm2 maximum power density
  • ANSI standards visible/NIR light is limited to 0.2 W/cm2
  • far IR light is limited to about 0.1 W/cm2.
  • the fluence of light at the excitatory wavelength produced by the first light source 218 may be modulated in order to provide sufficient energy to propagate through the skin in the first region 206 of the patient 202 to the exogenous fluorescent agent without photobleaching, and to illuminate the exogenous fluorescent agent with energy sufficient to induce detectable fluorescence at the first light detector 222 and/or the second light detector 224 .
  • the fluence of light at the emission wavelength produced by the second light source 220 may be modulated in order to provide sufficient energy to propagate through the skin in the first region 206 of the patient 202 and through the skin in the second region 208 and the third region 210 without photobleaching to emerge as detectable light at the first light detector 222 and the second light detector 224 , respectively.
  • the fluence of light produced by a light source at 450 nm or 500 nm may be limited to 1.5 and 5 mW/cm 2 , respectively, to prevent photo-bleaching.
  • the fluence of the light produced by the first light source 218 and the second light source 220 may be modulated by any suitable systems and/or devices without limitation as described herein above. This modulation may be enabled a single time during operation of the system 200 , and as a result, the fluence of the light produced by each of the first light source 218 and the second light source 220 may be relatively constant throughout the operation of the system 200 . In another aspect, the light modulation may be enabled at discrete times over the duration of operation of the system 200 , or the light modulation may be enabled continuously over the duration of operation of the system 200 .
  • the fluence of the light may be modulated via manual adjustment of any of the power source settings and/or optical device settings as described above when the system 200 is configured in an Engineering Mode.
  • the fluence of the light may be modulated automatically via one or more control schemes encoded in the light source control unit of the controller 212 as described herein below.
  • the degree of modulation may be specified at least in part on the basis of feedback measurements obtained by various sensors provide in the sensor head 204 of the system 200 including, but not limited to, additional light detectors 226 and temperature sensors 228 as described in additional detail herein below.
  • light produced by the first light source 218 and the second light source 220 are further characterized by a pulse width, defined herein as the duration of the produced light.
  • pulse width is typically used to characterize the performance of a light source that produces light in discrete pulses, such as a pulsed laser, it is to be understood that the term “light pulse”, as used herein, refers to any discrete burst of light produced by a single light source at a single wavelength to enable the acquisition of a single measurement of fluorescence by the system 200 .
  • pulse width refers to the duration of a single light pulse produced by a single light source.
  • the pulse width is typically selected based on one or more of at least several factors including, but not limited to: delivery of sufficient light energy to elicit detectable fluorescence from the exogenous fluorescent agent without photobleaching the exogenous fluorescent agent or other chromophores within the tissues of the patient 202 ; compliance with safety standards for light delivery to patients such as ANSI standards; light delivery at sufficiently high rate to enable data acquisition at a rate compatible with real-time monitoring of renal function; performance capabilities of the selected light sources, light detectors, and other devices of the system 200 ; preservation of the working life of light sources, light detectors, and other devices related to producing and detecting light energy; and any other relevant factors.
  • the pulse width of the light produced by the first light source 218 and the second light source 220 may be independently selected to be a duration ranging from about 0.0001 seconds to about 0.5 seconds. In various other aspects, the pulse width of the light produced by the first light source 218 and the second light source 220 may be independently selected to be a duration ranging from about 0.0001 seconds to about 0.001 seconds, from about 0.0005 seconds to about 0.005 seconds, from about 0.001 seconds to about 0.010 seconds, from about 0.005 seconds to about 0.05 seconds, from about 0.01 seconds to about 0.1 seconds, from about 0.05 seconds to about 0.15 seconds, from about 0.1 seconds to about 0.2 seconds, from about 0.15 seconds to about 0.25 seconds, from about 0.2 seconds to about 0.3 seconds, from about 0.25 seconds to about 0.35 seconds, from about 0.3 seconds to about 0.4 seconds, from about 0.35 seconds to about 0.45 seconds, and from about 0.4 seconds to about 0.5 seconds. In one aspect, the pulse widths of the light produced by the first light source 218
  • the light produced by the first light source 218 and the second light source 220 may be further characterized by a pulse rate, defined herein as the number of pulses produced by a light source per second.
  • pulse rate is typically used to characterize the performance of a light source that produces light in discrete pulses, such as a pulsed laser, it is to be understood that the term “pulse rate”, as used herein, refers to the rate of production of a discrete light pulse by a single light source at a single wavelength in association with the acquisition of measurements of fluorescence by the system 200 .
  • the pulse rate may be selected based on one or more of at least several factors including, but not limited to: compliance with safety standards for light delivery to patients such as ANSI standards; the performance capabilities of the selected light sources, light detectors, and other devices of the system 200 ; light delivery rates compatible with data acquisition rates sufficiently rapid for real-time monitoring of renal function; preserving the working life of light sources, light detectors, and other devices related to producing and detecting light energy; and any other relevant factor.
  • the light sources are configured to deliver light into the tissues of the patient 202 at a single position such as a first region 206 , illustrated schematically in FIG. 2 .
  • the delivery of light at both the excitatory wavelength and the emission wavelength to the same first region 206 enables both light pulses to share at least a portion of the optical path traveled through the tissues of the patient 202 between the point of entry at the first region 206 and the point of detection at the second region 208 and the third region 210 .
  • this arrangement of optical paths enhances the quality of data produced by the system 200 .
  • the first light source 218 and the second light source 220 may be operatively coupled to a common means of light delivery.
  • the first light source 218 and the second light source 220 may each be operatively coupled to a first optic fiber and a second optic fiber, respectively, and the first and second optic fibers may be joined to a third optic fiber configured to direct light from the first optic fiber and/or the second optic fiber into the first region 206 of the patient 202 .
  • the first light source 218 and the second light source 220 may be operatively coupled to a common optic fiber or other optical assembly configured to direct the light from the first light source 218 and/or the second light source 220 into the first region 206 of the patient 202 .
  • the light produced by the first light source 218 and the second light source 220 may be directed in an alternating pattern into the common optic fiber or other optical assembly using an adjustable optical device including, but not limited to, dichroic mirror or a rotating mirror.
  • the system 200 may include the sensor head 204 provided with a sensor mount 912 configured with one or more wells within which the light sources 218 / 220 and light detectors 222 / 224 may be attached in a predetermined arrangement.
  • the first light source 218 and the second light source 220 may be situated within a source well 902 of the sensor mount 912 positioned within the sensor head 204 (see FIG. 9 ).
  • the source well 902 may contain a first LED light source 218 producing light at the excitation wavelength and a second LED light source 220 producing light at the emission wavelength operatively coupled to a single light delivery aperture 1002 (see FIG.
  • the source well 902 further contains a first monitor photodiode 904 and a second monitor photodiode 906 , which are used to correct for variations in output power from the LED light sources as described in further detail herein below.
  • the skin of the patient 202 receives about 1% of the light energy produced by the LED light sources. In various other aspects, the skin of the patient 202 receives about 2%, about 3%, about 4%, about 5%, about 7.5%, about 10%, about 20%, and about 50% of the light energy produced by the LED light sources.
  • the fraction of light produced by the LED light sources delivered to the skin of the patient 202 may be increased by the incorporation of additional optical elements configured to focus and/or direct the light from each LED light source to the light delivery aperture 1002 .
  • a diffuser may be used to mix the output of the light sources so that the light energy is rendered homogeneous at the surface of the skin of the patient.
  • the system 200 further includes a first light detector 222 and a second light detector 224 in various aspects.
  • the first light detector 222 is configured to measure unfiltered light emitted from the tissue of the patient 202 at the second region 208
  • the second light detector 224 is configured to measure filtered light emitted from the tissue of the patient 202 at the third region 210 .
  • the second light detector 224 further comprises an optical filter 244 configured to block light at the excitation wavelength.
  • the first light detector 222 is configured to measure light received at both the excitation and emission wavelengths and the second light detector 224 is configured to detect light received at the emission wavelength only.
  • the measurements from the first light detector 222 and a second light detector 224 may be analyzed as described herein below to measure the fluorescence of an exogenous fluorescence agent and to correct the fluorescence measurements by removing the effects of the diffuse reflectance of light according to the correction methods described herein below.
  • the second region 208 and third region 210 within the tissues of the patient 202 are each separated by a nominal distance from the first region 206 to which light produced by the first light source 218 and the second light source 220 is delivered.
  • This nominal separation distance may be selected to balance two or more effects that may impact the quality of data detected by the light detectors.
  • the total detected signal from the light detectors may decrease due to light scattering along the longer optical path between light source and light detector. This effect may be mitigated by the choice of emission wavelength, which may result in a less pronounced decrease in the detected fluorescence signal (i.e. light at the emission wavelength) relative to the signals associated with detected light at the excitation wavelengths as the nominal separation distance increases. Longer nominal separation distances result in higher sensitivity to signal changes due to changing tissue optical properties.
  • the nominal separation distance may range from 0 mm (i.e. colocation of light sources and light detectors) to about 10 mm. In various other aspects, the nominal separation distance may range from about 1 mm to about 8 mm, from about 2 mm to about 6 mm, and from about 3 mm to about 5 mm. In various additional aspects, the nominal separation distance may be 0 mm, about 1 mm, about 2 mm, about 3 mm, about 4 mm, about 5 mm, about 6 mm, about 8 mm, and about 10 mm. In one aspect, the nominal separation distance may be about 4 mm to balance these competing effects of logarithmic drop-off of signal and reduced size of the background signal relative to the signal from the exogenous fluorescent agent.
  • the first light detector 222 may be positioned within a first detection well 908 of the sensor mount 912 and the second light detector 224 may be positioned within a second detection well 910 of the sensor mount 912 within the sensor head 204 .
  • the first light detector 222 and the second light detector 224 may receive light from tissue of the patient 202 through a first detector aperture 1004 and second detector aperture 1006 , respectively.
  • the first detector aperture 1004 , the second detector aperture 1006 , and the light delivery aperture 1002 are mutually separated from one another by the nominal separation distance disclosed herein above including, but not limited to, a nominal separation distance of 4 mm.
  • the first detection well 908 , second detection well 910 , and light source well 902 of the sensor mount 912 may be optically isolated from one another to ensure that light from the light sources 218 / 220 does not reach the light detectors 222 / 224 without coupling through the skin of the patient 202 .
  • the separation between the two detection wells 908 / 910 ensures that the detected fluorescence signal from the exogenous fluorescent agent is distinguishable from the unfiltered excitation light, as described in detail herein below.
  • the three apertures 704 of the aperture plate 702 are circular with a diameter ranging from about 0.5 mm to about 5 mm.
  • the diameters of the apertures may range from about 0.5 mm to about 1.5 mm, about 1 mm to about 2 mm, about 1.5 mm to about 2.5 mm, about 2 mm to about 3 mm, about 2.5 mm to about 3.5 mm, about 3 mm to about 4 mm, about 3.5 mm to about 4.5 mm, and about 4 mm to about 5 mm.
  • the three apertures 704 of the aperture plate 702 are circular apertures with a diameter of about 1 mm diameter. This finite width of the apertures may result in an effective source-detector separation of less than the nominal separation distance because of the logarithmic drop-off of signal with increasing separation distance from the light sources at the skin interface of the sensor head 204 .
  • the light detectors 222 / 224 of the system 200 may be any suitable light detection device without limitation.
  • suitable light detection devices include: photoemission detectors such as photomultiplier tubes, phototubes, and microchannel plate detectors; photoelectric detectors such as LEDs reverse-biased to act as photodiodes, photoresistors, photodiodes, phototransistors; and any other suitable light detection devices.
  • the light detectors 222 / 224 are sufficiently sensitive to detect the fluorescence emitted by the exogenous fluorescent agents within the tissues of patients 202 that include melanin ranging from about 1% to about 40% melanin in the epidermis and blood volume ranging from about 0.5% to about 2% of the skin volume.
  • the light detectors 222 / 224 may be silicon photomultiplier (SPM) devices.
  • the first light detector 222 may be configured to detect light at both the excitatory frequency and at the emission frequency
  • the second light detector 224 may be configured to detect light at the emission frequency only.
  • the second light detector 224 may respond only to light of the emission wavelength as a result of the design and materials of the sensor elements of the second light detector 224 .
  • the second light detector 224 may respond to a wider range of light wavelengths, but may be positioned downstream from an optical filter configured to pass only the portion of incoming light with the emission wavelength and further configured to block the passage of light wavelengths outside of the emission wavelength.
  • any suitable optical filter may be selected for use with the second light detector 224 to detect light selectively at the emission wavelength.
  • suitable optical filters include absorptive filters and interference/dichroic filters.
  • absorptive filters include absorptive filters and interference/dichroic filters.
  • interference/dichroic filters include absorptive filters and interference/dichroic filters.
  • the second light detector 224 may be positioned downstream of an absorptive long-pass filter configured to pass light above a predetermined wavelength to the second light detector 224 .
  • the second light detector 224 may be positioned downstream of an long-pass OG530 filter configured to pass light with wavelengths above about 530 nm.
  • suitable filters include a Hoya O54 filter and a Hoya CM500 filter.
  • an absorption filter 244 configured to absorb excitation wavelength light may be positioned within the second detection well 910 between the second light detector 224 and the second detector aperture 1006 .
  • the absorption filter 244 may be constructed from OG530 Schott glass.
  • the thickness of the absorption filter 244 may be selected to enable an optical density sufficient to filter the excitation light by about three orders of magnitude. In one aspect, the thickness of the absorption filter 244 may range from about 1 mm to about 10 mm. In various other aspects, the thickness of the absorption filter 244 may range from about 1 mm to about 8 mm, from about 2 mm to about 6 mm, and from about 3 mm to about 5 mm.
  • the thickness of the absorption filter 244 may be about 1 mm, about 2 mm, about 3 mm, about 4 mm, about 5 mm, about 6 mm, about 7 mm, about 8 mm, about 9 mm, and about 10 mm.
  • the absorption filter 244 is a 3-mm thick filter constructed of OG530 Schott glass.
  • an optical diffuser may be provided within the light source well 902 .
  • the optical diffuser enables mixing of the light entering the light source well 902 from the first and second light sources 218 / 220 .
  • the similarity of the optical paths taken by emission-wavelength light and excitation-wavelength light through the tissues of the patient is enhanced relative to the corresponding optical paths taken by unmixed light, thereby reducing a potential source of variation.
  • a transparent material configured to pass light of both the excitatory and emission wavelengths may be positioned within the first detection well 908 between the first light detector 222 and the first detector aperture 1004 .
  • the transparent material may be any material with similar optical properties to the material of the absorption filter 244 including, but not limited to, thickness and index of refraction.
  • the transparent material within the first detection well 908 may be fused silica glass of the same thickness as the absorption filter 244 .
  • the transmission spectrum of the OG 530 filter is provided in FIG. 3 .
  • the transmission spectrum of the OG 530 filter overlaps with the emission spectrum of the MB-102 exogenous fluorescent agent and the emission spectrum of a green LED used as a second light source 220 (emission wavelength).
  • the transmission spectrum of the OG 530 filter excludes the emission spectrum of the blue LED used as a first light source 218 and the absorbance spectrum of the MB-102 exogenous fluorescent agent (excitation wavelength).
  • the transparent material such as glass 246 and the absorption filter 244 may be secured to ledges formed within the first detection well 908 and the second detection well 910 , respectively.
  • the transparent material such as glass 246 and the optical filter 244 may be secured in place using an opaque and/or light absorbing adhesive including, but not limited to, black epoxy to ensure that all light received through the first detector aperture 1004 and the second detector aperture 1006 travels through the optical filter 244 or glass 246 before detection by the first and second light detectors 222 / 224 .
  • the sides of the optical filter 244 or glass 246 may be painted black with a light-absorbing coating including, but not limited to, India ink to ensure that light does not reach the first and second light detectors 222 / 224 without passing through the optical filter 244 or glass 246 .
  • the height of the detection wells 908 / 910 combined with the diameter of the detector apertures 1004 / 1006 may limit the fraction of the light emitted from the second region 208 and third region 210 of the patient's skin that reaches the active areas of the light detectors 222 / 224 due to the Lambertian distribution of the angle of the light leaving the patient's skin.
  • the fraction of light emitted from the second region 208 and third region 210 of the patient's skin received by the light detectors 222 / 224 may range from about 5% to about 90%.
  • the fraction of light may range from about 5% to about 15%, from about 10% to about 20%, from about 15% to about 25%, from about 20% to about 30%, from about 25% to about 35%, from about 30% to about 40%, from about 35% to about 45%, from about 40% to about 60%, from about 50% to about 70%, and from about 60% to about 90%.
  • the sensor head 204 illustrated in FIG. 6 and FIG. 7 with 1-mm diameter apertures 1002 / 1004 / 1006 about 10% of the light emitted from the surface of the patient's skin may reach the active area of the light detectors 222 / 224 to be detected.
  • the sensor head 204 may further include additional optical elements including, but not limited to, lenses and/or prisms configured to compensate for the Lambertian distribution of light angles in order to enhance the fraction of light emitted from the patient's skin that is directed to the active area of the light detectors 222 / 224 .
  • the sensor head 204 may further include one or more additional temperature sensors 228 configured to monitor temperatures of various regions within the sensor head 204 and in the vicinity of the sensor head 204 .
  • suitable regions for which the temperature may be monitored by the one or more additional temperature sensors 228 include: temperature at the skin surface of the patient 202 ; temperature in the vicinity of the first light source 218 and/or second light source 220 ; ambient temperature outside of the sensor head 204 ; temperature of housing 600 of sensor head 204 ; and any other suitable region.
  • additional temperature sensors 228 may be configured to monitor the temperatures in the vicinity of temperature-sensitive electrical components including, but not limited to: light sources 218 / 220 such as LEDs, light detectors 222 / 224 such as silicon photomultipliers (SPMs), and any other temperature-sensitive electrical components of the sensor head 204 .
  • one or more temperatures measured by one or more additional temperature sensors 228 may be used as feedbacks in a control method for one or more of the temperature-sensitive devices of the system 200 as described herein below.
  • a temperature measurement may be used to control the amount of light energy produced by an LED used as a first or second light source 218 / 220 .
  • LED temperatures measured by an second temperature sensor 1108 may be used in a control scheme to modulate the amount of power supplied to an LED light source to compensate for the effect of LED temperature on the light output of the LED.
  • additional temperature sensors 228 may monitor the temperatures of LED light sources 218 / 220 to monitor and/or compensate for temperature variations of the LEDs as well as to monitor and/or compensate for temperature-dependent transmission of the optical filters to maintain relatively constant output wavelengths.
  • an additional temperature sensor 228 may be included in the sensor head 204 in the form of a thermistor 816 (see FIG. 8 ) configured to monitor the temperature of the housing 600 in the vicinity of the contact surface 606 of the sensor head 204 .
  • the thermistor 816 may be epoxied into the temperature sensor opening 706 in the aperture plate 702 in one aspect.
  • the space 918 between the circuit board (not shown) and the lower housing 604 may be filled with a thermally conductive putty to ensure good thermal conduction and dissipation.
  • the measured housing temperature may be used to modulate the light output of the sensor head 204 to prevent overheating of the skin of the patient 202 during use.
  • additional temperature sensors 228 may monitor the temperatures of LED light sources 218 / 220 to monitor and/or compensate for temperature variations of the LEDs to enable the maintenance of relatively constant output wavelengths by the LED light sources 218 / 220 .
  • temperatures measured by one or more additional temperature sensors 228 may provide for subject safety by disabling one or more electrical devices including the light sources 218 / 220 and/or light detectors 222 / 224 if an over-temperature condition is detected.
  • an over-temperature condition may be indicated if the case temperature detected by the thermistor 816 is greater than about 40° C.
  • an over-temperature condition may be detected of the case temperature is greater than about 40.5° C. or greater than about 41.0° C.
  • the system 200 in various aspects may include a controller 212 configured to operate the light sources 218 / 200 and light detectors 222 / 224 in a coordinated fashion to obtain a plurality of measurements used to obtain the fluorescence of the exogenous fluorescent agent within the tissues of the patient 202 , to correct the fluorescence data to remove the effects of the diffuse reflectance of light as described herein below, and to transform the fluorescence measurements into a parameter representative of the renal function of the patient 202 .
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of an electronic circuit 1100 that illustrates the arrangement of various electrical components that enable the operation of the system 200 in an aspect.
  • the controller 212 may be a computing device further including an operation unit 214 and a display unit 216 .
  • the controller 212 may include a light source control unit 230 configured to operate the first light source 218 and the second light source 220 to produce light at the excitation wavelength and emission wavelength, respectively in a coordinated manner to produce a repeating pulse sequence as illustrated schematically in FIG. 5 .
  • the light source control unit 230 may produce a plurality of light control signals encoding one or more light control parameters including, but not limited to: activation or deactivation of each light source; relative timing of activation and deactivation of each light source to enable light pulse width, pulse repetition rate, electrical power delivered to the light source or other parameter associated with light pulse fluence or light pulse power; other light source-specific parameters controlling the light output of the light source; and any other relevant light control parameter.
  • the light source control unit 230 may receive one or more feedback measurements used to modulate the plurality of control signals to compensate for variations in performance of the light sources in order to maintain a relatively stable output of light from the light sources.
  • feedback measurements used by the light source control unit 230 include: light output of the light sources 218 / 220 measured within the source well 902 by the first monitor photodiode 904 and the second monitor photodiode 906 , respectively, temperatures of the light sources 218 / 220 , and any other feedback measurement relevant to monitoring the performance of light sources 218 / 220 .
  • the light source control unit 230 may be configured to operate LED light sources 218 / 220 .
  • the light output of the LED light sources 218 / 220 may be controlled by controlling the magnitude of current provided to each LED.
  • the light source control unit 230 may include at least one waveform generator 1122 including, but not limited to, a field programmable gate array FPGA with a 16-bit DAC 1124 operatively coupled to a LED current source 1126 , as illustrated in FIG. 11 .
  • waveforms generated by the at least one waveform generator 1122 including, but not limited to square waves, may control the output from the LED current source 1126 .
  • the magnitude of the current supplied to the LED light sources 218 / 220 may be adjustable based on the waveform signals provided by the waveform generator/FPGA 1122 .
  • each light pulse sequence 500 includes an emission wavelength light pulse 502 and an excitatory wavelength light pulse 504 that are both made up of a plurality of square waves 506 produced by the first and second LED light sources 218 / 220 .
  • square waves generated by the waveform generator 1122 are received by the LED current source 1126 .
  • the current generated by the LED current source includes a square waveform similar to the waveform generated by the waveform generator 1122 .
  • the intensity of light produced by the LED light sources 218 / 220 is proportional to the magnitude of the current received, the light produced by the LED light sources 218 / 220 also includes the square waveform as illustrated in FIG. 5 .
  • the square waves produced by the waveform generator 1122 may also be used by the acquisition unit 234 in a synchronous detection method to reduce the effects of various confounding factors including, but not limited to, the detection of ambient light, from the detector signals generated by the light detectors 222 / 224 during illumination of the tissues of the patient at the emission and excitatory wavelengths by the first and second light sources 218 / 220 , respectively.
  • the excitation and emission pulses are delivered in an alternating series interspersed with a dark period after each pulse.
  • the first and second LED light sources 218 / 220 are each modulated with a 50% duty cycle but at different modulation frequencies, allowing the signals associated with the excitation and emission pulses to be separated by frequency filtering.
  • the overall optical power delivered to the patient's skin may be limited by at least two factors: photobleaching of the exogenous fluorescent agent and/or endogenous chromophores, as well as overheating of the patient's tissues illuminated by the system 200 .
  • tissue heating may impose an absolute limit of about 9 mW on the optical power that can be delivered to the skin, based on safety standards including, but not limited to, ANSI/IESNA RP-27.1-05.
  • photobleaching of the skin autofluorescence associated with endogenous chromophores including, but not limited to, collagen, hemoglobin, and melanin may contribute a background signal to the measured fluorescence that remains relatively constant so long as no autobleaching of the chromophores occurs.
  • This constant autofluorescence background may be subtracted from the raw fluorescence signal, but if autofluorescence varies over time due to photobleaching, this background correction may interfere with the kinetic calculation of the renal decay time constant (RDTC).
  • the light output power of the first light source 218 and/or second light source 220 may be limited to levels below power thresholds associated with chromophore photobleaching.
  • the light output of the light sources 218 / 220 may be measured using monitor photodiodes 904 / 906 in various aspects. Because the light intensity reaching these monitor photodiodes 904 / 906 is typically much stronger than the light intensity that reaches the light detectors 222 / 224 through the patient's skin, less sensitive light detecting devices including, but not limited to, PIN photodiodes may be used to monitor the output of the light sources 218 / 220 .
  • the system 200 may be configured to operate over a range of skin tones observed in the human population. Without being limited to any particular theory, variations in skin tones between different patients 202 may result in variations in the detected fluorescence signals ranging over about three orders of magnitude. In addition, variations in the concentrations of exogenous fluorescent agent within each patient 202 may vary over a range of about two orders of magnitude due to renal elimination of the agent over time. In various aspects, the system 200 may be configured to detect fluorescence from the endogenous fluorescent agent over an intensity range of more than five orders of magnitude. In these various aspects, the system 200 may be configured by modulation of at least one operational parameter including, but not limited to: magnitude of light output by the light sources 218 / 220 and sensitivity of light detectors 222 / 224 corresponding to detector gains.
  • the intensity of the light output by the light sources 218 / 220 may be manually set by a user via the operation unit 214 .
  • the light source control unit 230 may be configured to modulate the intensity of light produced by the light sources 218 / 220 automatically.
  • the light source control unit 230 may be configured to control the light intensity produced by the LED light sources 218 / 220 within a range of normalized output intensities from 0 (off) to 1 (maximum power).
  • the intensity of the light sources 218 / 220 may be set by the light source control unit 230 in coordination with the detector gains of the light detectors 222 / 224 set by the light detector control unit 232 , as described herein below.
  • signals obtained during the first 10 detection cycles obtained by the system 200 after initialization of data acquisition, but prior to the injection of the exogenous fluorescent agent may be used by the light source control unit 230 to automatically adjust the light intensity produced by the LED light sources 218 / 220 , as well as the gain of the light detectors 222 / 224 .
  • the initial detection cycle may be obtained with the LED light sources 218 / 220 set at about 10% of maximum LED intensity (corresponding to a normalized output intensity of 0.1) and with a low gain setting for the light detectors 222 / 224 .
  • the corresponding LED intensities may be modulated to enable the analog signals produced by the light detectors 222 / 224 to correspond to about 1 ⁇ 4 of the full range of each detector analog-to-digital convertor (ADC) at the low detector gain setting. If the signals produced by the light detectors 222 / 224 in response to the light produced by the second LED light source 220 at the emission wavelength do not agree, the larger signal may be used to modulate the power setting of the second LED light source 220 .
  • ADC analog-to-digital convertor
  • the LED intensity setting is set to the maximum setting.
  • the targeted levels of signals produced by the light detectors 222 / 224 i.e. 1 ⁇ 4 of the ADC range
  • the targeted levels of signals produced by the light detectors 222 / 224 is selected to reserve additional light detection capacity to detect signals resulting from variations in optical properties of the tissues of the patient 202 during the study due to any one or more of a plurality of factors including, but not limited to, the introduction of the exogenous fluorescent agent into the patient 202 .
  • the LED intensities are set by the light source control unit 230 in coordination with the detector gains of the light detectors 222 / 224 set by the light detector control unit 232 over the first 10 detection cycles, an additional 10 detection cycles are obtained to confirm the suitability of these settings for operation of the system 200 given the tissue properties of the particular patient 202 , followed by a recalculation of the LED intensity settings and detector gains as described herein. If the newly calculated LED intensity is within a factor of two of the previously determined setting, and the detector gains are not changed, the previously determined settings are maintained for subsequent data acquisition cycles used to determine renal function. Otherwise, the settings are updated using the same method described herein and another 10 data acquisition cycles conducted to confirm the stability of the settings.
  • This process repeats until either the settings are determined to be acceptably stable or 10 data acquisition cycles are conducted to obtain the settings, in which case the most recently determined settings are used for all subsequent data acquisitions, and the user may be notified via the display unit 216 that the settings may not be optimal.
  • the controller 212 may include a light detector control unit 232 configured to operate the first light detector 222 and the second light detector 224 to enable the detection of light at the emission wavelength and unfiltered light at all wavelengths, respectively.
  • the light detector control unit 232 may produce a plurality of detector control signals encoding one or more detector control parameters including, but not limited to, detector gains.
  • the light detector control unit 232 may produce a plurality of light measurement signals encoding the intensity of light detected by the light detectors 222 / 224 including, but not limited to raw detector signals that may be received by an analog-to-digital convertor (ADC) 1102 (see FIG. 11 ) in various aspects.
  • ADC analog-to-digital convertor
  • the detector gains and/or other detector control signals may be manually set by a user detector gains when the system 200 is configured in an Engineering Mode.
  • the amount of light received by the light detectors 222 / 224 may vary due to any one or more of at least several factors including, but not limited to: variation in skin tones observed between individual patients 202 , variations in the concentrations of exogenous fluorescent agent within each patient 202 , and any other relevant parameter.
  • gains of the first light detector 222 and the second light detector 224 may be set by a user via the operation unit 214 .
  • the light detector control unit 232 may be configured to modulate the gain of the light detectors 222 / 224 automatically via a bias voltage gain of the bias voltage generator 1112 (see FIG. 11 ).
  • signals obtained during the first 10 detection cycles obtained by the system 200 after initialization of data acquisition, but prior to the injection of the exogenous fluorescent agent may be used by the light detector control unit 232 to automatically adjust the gains of the light detectors 222 / 224 , as well as the output intensities of the light sources 218 / 220 .
  • the initial detection cycle may be obtained with the LED light sources 218 / 220 set at about 10% of maximum LED intensity (corresponding to a normalized output intensity of 0.1) and with a low gain setting for the light detectors 222 / 224 and the LED intensities may be modulated to enable the analog signals produced by the light detectors 222 / 224 to correspond to about 1 ⁇ 4 of the full range of each detector analog-to-digital convertor (ADC) at the low detector gain setting.
  • ADC analog-to-digital convertor
  • a high detector gain may be considered for the second light detector 224 corresponding to the filtered measurements of the excitation wavelength only.
  • the high detector gain may be 10-fold higher than the corresponding low detector gain for a given light detector.
  • the expected peak detected fluorescence signal from the exogenous fluorescence agent over the course of injection and renal elimination is typically expected to be about 10% of the magnitude of the signal received during illumination at the excitation wavelength by the first light source 218 , assuming that the exogenous fluorescence agent is MB-102 introduced into the patient 202 at a dose level of about 4 ⁇ mol/kg of patient weight.
  • the expected detector signal received during illumination at maximum LED intensity and with the detector gain set to the high setting remains below 10% of the range of the detector ADC, the detector gain for that measurement be increased by ten-fold.
  • the saturation condition may persist for a pre-defined period of time including, but not limited to, a 30-second period before adjustments are made to the detector gain or LED power to avoid reacting to spurious signal spikes.
  • the light detector control unit 232 may adjust the detector gain to a lower gain level if the detected light signals from one of the light detectors 222 / 224 exceed a threshold percentage of the maximum ADC range to avoid signal saturation.
  • the threshold percentage of the maximum ADC range may be 40%, 35%, 30%, 25%, 20%, 18%, 17%, 16%, 15%, 14%, 13%, 12%, 11%, 10%, 9%, 8%, 7%, 6%, or 5% of the maximum ADC range.
  • the gain setting will be adjusted.
  • the detector gain on the nearly saturated signal is high, it will be adjusted to low. If the current detector gain is set to low and the corresponding detected light signal remains above the threshold percentage of the maximum ADC range, the LED output power setting of the corresponding LED light source may be reduced ten-fold.
  • the light detector control unit 232 may receive one or more feedback measurements used to modulate the plurality of detector signals to compensate for variations in the performance of the light detectors due to variations in temperature and/or light source output.
  • feedback measurements used by the light detector control unit 232 include: light output of the light sources 218 / 220 measured within the source well 902 by the first monitor photodiode 904 and the second monitor photodiode 906 , respectively (see FIG.
  • temperatures of the light detectors 222 / 224 measured by a first temperature sensor 1106 LED temperatures measured by a second temperature sensor 1108 , temperature of the sensor head housing measured by a third temperature sensor 1128 , LED supply current from the LED current source 1126 , and any other feedback measurement relevant to monitoring the performance of light detectors 222 / 224 .
  • the light detectors 222 / 224 may be silicon photon multiplier (SPM) detectors that may include low-noise internal amplification, and may function at lower light levels relative to other light sensor devices such as PIN photodiodes.
  • SPM silicon photon multiplier
  • the detector signal generated by the SPM detectors 222 / 224 may be amplified using transimpedance amplifiers 1120 / 1118 , respectively (see FIG. 11 ) to translate a current generated by each SPM light detector 222 / 224 into a measurable detector voltage.
  • the transimpedance amplifier 1118 on the second SPM light detector 224 i.e.
  • the switchable detector gain may select a low gain configured to detect a larger dynamic range for fluorescence measurements when the first LED light source 218 is activated to produce light at the emission wavelength.
  • the switchable detector gain that may further select a high gain setting for the second SPM light detector 224 when the second light source 220 is inactive to enhance the sensitivity of the second SPM light detector 224 during the phase of the detection cycle when light at the emission wavelength produced by the exogenous fluorescent agent within the tissues of the patient 202 is detected, to ensure that the expected dark current from the second SPM light detector 224 occupies less than 1 ⁇ 4 of the total ADC output range.
  • the second transimpedance amplifier of the second SPM light detector 224 may include a low detector gain configured to provide a transimpedance gain of about 4 k ⁇ corresponding to about twice the value of the transimpedance resistor due to differential operation, and may further include a high detector gain configured to provide a transimpedance gain of about 40 k ⁇
  • the first transimpedance amplifier of the first SPM light detector 222 may include a fixed detector gain configured to provide a transimpedance gain of about 2 k ⁇ .
  • the controller 212 may further include an acquisition unit 234 in various aspects.
  • the acquisition unit 234 may be configured to receive a plurality of signals from the light sources 218 / 220 , light detectors 222 / 224 , and additional light detectors 226 and additional temperature sensors 228 and processing the plurality of signals to produce one or more raw signals including, but not limited to, raw fluorescence signals encoding the intensity of fluorescence detected by the second light detector 224 during illumination at the excitation wavelength, and raw internal reflectance signals corresponding to the intensity of light at the excitation wavelength detected by the first light detector 222 during illumination at the excitation wavelength as well as the intensity of light at the emission wavelength detected by the both light detectors 222 / 224 during illumination at the emission wavelength.
  • the plurality of signals received from the various sensors and devices described herein above are typically analog signals including, but not limited to, electrical voltages and currents.
  • the acquisition unit 234 may enable the transmission of the analog signals to one or more analog-to-digital converters (ADCs) to convert the analog signals into digital signals for subsequent processing by the processing unit 236 .
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of a circuit 1100 illustrating the arrangement of various electrical devices and components of the sensor head 204 .
  • the analog signals encoding the intensity of light detected by the first light detector 222 and the second light detector 224 may be received by a first ADC 1102 .
  • the analog signals produced by the light detectors 222 / 224 and various monitor sensors may be digitized using at least one 24-bit Sigma-Delta ADC.
  • analog signals encoding the measurements from time-sensitive sensors may be digitized using a high-speed 24-bit Sigma-Delta ADC 1102 in one aspect.
  • time-sensitive sensors include sensors associated with the production and detection of light pulses characterized by potentially rapidly-changing signals.
  • Non-limiting examples of time-sensitive sensors of the system 200 include: first and second light detectors 1118 / 1120 , and first and second monitor photodiodes 904 / 906 .
  • analog signals encoding the measurements from less time-sensitive sensors may be digitized using a low-speed 24-bit Sigma-Delta ADC 1104 .
  • the less time-sensitive sensors include sensors associated with monitoring system conditions characterized by typically slow-changing signals including, but not limited to, temperatures of various system components and/or regions.
  • Non-limiting examples of less time-sensitive sensors of the system 200 include: a first and second thermistor 1106 / 1108 configured to monitor the temperatures of the light sensors 222 / 224 and light sources 218 / 220 , respectively, and a third temperature sensor 1128 configured to monitor a temperature of the housing 600 of the sensor head 204 .
  • the acquisition unit 234 may be further configured to enable synchronous detection of light by detectors 222 / 224 .
  • synchronous detection methods are thought to reject noise from the detector signals associated with the detection of light produced by the light sources 118 / 120 and fluorescence produced by the exogenous fluorescent agents within the tissues of the patient 202 by distinguishing the detector signals from noise associated with the detection of ambient light or other sources of interference.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic illustration of a synchronous detection method in one aspect.
  • the waveform generator/FPA 1122 may generate a digital square wave 1202 that is received by the DAC 1124 , and the resulting analog-converted square wave is received by the LED current source 1126 .
  • the resulting current produced by the LED current source 1126 also characterized by a waveform proportional to the analog-converted square wave drives LED light sources 218 / 220 .
  • the light produced by LED light sources 218 / 220 after passing through the tissues of the patient 202 are detected, along with the fluorescence produced by the endogenous fluorescent agent, by the light detectors 222 / 224 and are digitized by the high-speed ADC 1102 .
  • the digital square wave 1202 generated by the waveform generator/FPA 1122 may also be converted by a DAC 1110 (see FIG. 11 ) to an in-phase reference sine wave 1210 and an out-of-phase/quadrature reference cosine wave 1212 .
  • the digitized detector signals from the ADC 1102 and the in-phase reference sine wave 1210 may be sampled and subjected to signed multiplication at a first multiplier 1214 to generate a plurality of in-phase modulated signals.
  • the digitized detector signals and the quadrature reference cosine wave 1212 may be sampled and subjected to signed multiplication at a second multiplier 1216 to generate a plurality of quadrature (out-of-phase) modulated signals.
  • the acquisition unit 234 may delay the samples from the reference waves 1210 / 1214 by an amount equivalent to the relative delay between the DAC 1124 generating the reference waves 1210 / 1214 and the ADC 1102 digitizing the detector signals to synchronize the reference waves 1210 / 1214 to the detector data being acquired.
  • the in-phase modulated signals may be summed in a first accumulator 1218 to generate an in-phase intensity signal 1224 .
  • the quadrature modulated signals may be summed in a third accumulator 1222 to generate a quadrature intensity signal 1228 .
  • the raw digitized detector signal may also be summed in a second accumulator 1220 to generate an average intensity signal 1226 .
  • the in-phase intensity signal 1224 and the quadrature intensity signal 1228 may be root-sum squared to generate a magnitude signal 1230 .
  • the integration interval of the accumulators 1218 / 1220 / 1222 may correspond to an integer number of modulation cycles (corresponding to cycles of the digital square wave 1202 ) to avoid a bias on the measured signal.
  • the phase accumulators 1218 / 1220 / 1222 used to control the synchronous detection operates on integer numbers, but the sample clock frequency and the modulation frequency are not integer-divisible, so the number of cycles is not exactly an integer.
  • the error associated with this mismatch may be minimized by adjusting the actual modulation frequency to match as closely as possible with the achievable sampling intervals and allocating an appropriate number of bits to the phase accumulator.
  • the error associated with the mismatch between the modulation frequency and the sampling intervals may be on the order of about one part in 10 6 .
  • the digital square wave 1202 used to modulate the LED light sources 218 / 220 and to enable synchronous detection method as described herein above is produced at a frequency of about 1 kHz.
  • a square wave was selected as the modulating waveform to enable an enhancement in signal to noise ratio (SNR), as compared to a pure sinusoidal wave as the modulating waveform for the same peak power level.
  • SNR signal to noise ratio
  • the acquisition unit 234 may be further configured to enable demodulation of the in-phase intensity signal 1224 , average intensity signal 1226 , and quadrature intensity signal 1228 .
  • the acquisition unit 234 may pick out each component at the fundamental harmonic, which is characterized by an amplitude that is (4/ ⁇ ) times larger than the amplitude of the square wave 1202 used to modulate the intensity signals 1224 / 1226 / 1228 .
  • the integration period of the accumulators 1218 / 1220 / 1222 may be selected to be a multiple of 100 ms. In these various aspects, this selected integration period ensures that integration by the accumulators 1218 / 1220 / 1222 occurs over an integer number of cycles for the 50, 60, 100, and 120 Hz signals.
  • the controller 212 may further include a processing unit 236 configured to apply corrections to the demodulated detector signals and to transform a selected portion of the corrected detector signals into a measure of renal function in various aspects.
  • FIG. 13 is a block diagram illustrating the subunits of processing unit 236 in an aspect.
  • the processing unit 236 may include a pre-processing subunit 1302 configured to determine and correct the detector signals to remove signal artifacts associated with a variety of confounding effects including, but not limited to, physiologically-induced signal variations, variations in power supplied to the light sources 218 / 220 , non-linearities in detector response, ambient temperature variation, and tissue heterogeneity.
  • the processing unit 236 may further include a baseline subtraction subunit 1304 configured to remove the portion of the detector signals attributable to extraneous factors such as autofluorescence of the tissues and/or leakage of light at the excitation wavelength through the optical filter 244 of the second light detector 224 .
  • the processing unit 236 may additionally include a diffuse reflectance correction subunit 1306 configured to enable a method of applying a diffuse reflectance correction method to remove the effects of the diffuse reflectance of light within the tissues of the patient 202 .
  • the processing unit 236 may further include a post-equilibrium selection subunit 1308 configured to select a portion of the detector data associated with the post-agent administration period for subsequent analysis to determine renal function of the patient.
  • the processing unit 236 may further include an RDTC calculation subunit 1310 configured to transform the detector signals obtained over the post-agent administration period to produce a renal decay time constant indicative of the renal function of the patient.
  • the processing unit 236 may also include a fault detection subunit 1312 configured to monitor the magnitudes of the detector signals to detect any malfunctions of the system.
  • the raw signals corresponding to the light intensity detected by light detectors 222 / 224 corresponding to illumination by the first light source 218 and the second light source 220 at the excitation and emission wavelength, respectively are pre-processed using various modules of the pre-processing subunit 1302 to remove the effects of a plurality of confounding factors from the raw signals, resulting in signals that more accurately reflect the underlying specific signals of interest.
  • the intensity of light produced by a light source may vary due to one or more of a plurality of factors including, but not limited to: fluctuations in the electrical current supplied to the light source and variations in the ambient temperature of the light source.
  • Light characterized by two or more wavelengths emanating from the same source aperture of the sensor head may not share the same path to the same detector.
  • the detectors may have thermally-dependent sensitivity and gain.
  • the optical filter associated with the second light detector 224 may have temperature-dependent transmission properties.
  • the pre-processing subunit 1302 is configured to process the raw signals corresponding to light intensities detected by the first and second light detectors 222 / 224 in order to remove one or more of the measurement errors associated with the devices and elements of the system 200 and patient-specific factors including, but not limited to, the plurality of factors described above.
  • FIG. 22A is a block diagram illustrating the modules of the pre-processing subunit 1302 in one aspect.
  • FIG. 22B is a block diagram illustrating the modules of the pre-processing subunit 1302 a in a second aspect.
  • the pre-processing subunit 1302 1) resamples the signals using the methods of the resampling module 2202 as described below, 2) removes saturated detector signals using the methods of the detector output saturation detection and removal module 2204 as described below, 3) corrects for temperature-dependent detector gain using the methods of the detector temperature correction module 2206 described below, 4) corrects the signals for instrument light directionality using the methods of the light directionality correction module 2208 described below, 5) corrects the signals for filter throughput and temperature-dependent variation of fluorescence light using the methods of the filter throughput temperature correction (emission) module 2212 described below, 6) corrects for tissue heterogeneity using the methods of the tissue heterogeneity correction module 2216 described below, 7) corrects the signals for filter throughput and temperature-dependent variation of excitation light and signal decomposition using the methods of the filter throughput temperature correction (excitation) module and signal decomposition module 2214 as described below, 8) corrects for optical power variation using the methods of the fractional photo
  • the pre-processing subunit 1302 a calculates signal magnitudes using the methods of the detector temperature correction module 2206 a as described below, resamples the signals using the methods of the resampling module 2202 a as described below, removes saturated samples using the methods of the detector output saturation detection and removal module 2204 a as described below, corrects the signals for temperature-dependent detector gain using the methods of the detector temperature correction module 2206 a described below, corrects the signals for optical power variation using the methods of the fractional photon normalization module 2218 a as described below, corrects for excitation light leakthrough onto the measured fluorescence signal using the filter throughput temperature correction (excitation) module and signal decomposition module 2214 a as described below, and corrects for fluorescence light leakthrough onto the measured excitation diffuse reflectance signal using the filter throughput temperature correction (emission) module 2212 a as described below.
  • the pre-processing subunit 1302 / 1302 a in various aspects includes a resampling module 2202 / 2202 a configured to reduce signal variations associated with physiological processes of the patient 202 including, but not limited to, heartbeat and breathing.
  • a resampling module 2202 / 2202 a configured to reduce signal variations associated with physiological processes of the patient 202 including, but not limited to, heartbeat and breathing.
  • an acquisition sequence is characterized by alternating interval of illumination at the excitation and emission separated by intervals of no illumination (i.e. dark intervals).
  • both illumination intervals excitation/emission
  • the dark interval between the excitation and emission illumination intervals results in a separation interval between the excitation and emission illumination intervals.
  • physiological noise may be introduced to the signals.
  • this physiological noise may be reduced by resampling the signals associated with the excitation and emission illumination to overlap prior to subsequent processing of the signals.
  • a sample sequence may include a 100 ms dark interval, a 100 ms interval of illumination at the excitatory wavelength, a second 100 ms dark interval, and a 100 ms interval of illumination at the emission wavelength.
  • Each sample packet is logged with a single timestamp, and each sample packet is separated by a 400 ms interval. Because physiological signal variations, such as from heartbeats, occur on this same timescale, the 200 ms difference between signal acquisition associated with the excitatory and emission wavelengths becomes apparent in the signals. This physiological signal noise may be reduced using the pre-processing subunit 1302 by first resampling the signals associated with illumination at the excitatory and emission wavelength illumination to overlap prior to performing any additional signal processing as described below.
  • the signals associated with illumination at the excitatory wavelength may be shifted forward by 100 ms and the signals associated with illumination at the emission wavelength may be shifted backwards by 100 ms, resulting in an overlap of the signals.
  • the resampling module 2202 performs resampling as described above on signals detected by both the first and second detectors 222 / 224 .
  • the resampling module 2202 functions as a form of low-pass filter.
  • the pre-processing subunit 1302 / 1302 a in various aspects includes a detector output saturation detection and removal module 2204 / 2204 a configured to detect and remove signal values that fall outside the detection range of the light detectors 222 / 224 .
  • the pre-processing subunit 1302 compares the detected signals to the maximum ADC signal. If any signal falls within a threshold range of the maximum ADC signal using the average or peak signal value, the detector output saturation detection and removal module 2204 identifies and removes that value from further processing.
  • the pre-processing subunit 1302 / 1302 a in various aspects includes a detector temperature correction module 2206 / 2206 a configured to enable a temperature correction to compensate for the thermal sensitivity of the light detectors 222 / 224 .
  • the intrinsic detector gain for a silicon photomultiplier (SPM) device typically used as a light detector is proportional to the difference between the device breakdown voltage and the bias voltage applied by the bias voltage generator 1112 (see FIG. 11 ), referred to herein as an overvoltage.
  • the breakdown voltage varies with temperature in a well-characterized manner.
  • the temperature correction accounts for both this internal detector gain variation and additionally temperature-related variation in the photon detection efficiency.
  • the temperature correction may be a scaling correction applied to the detector measurements in which the scaling correction is based on a measured detector temperature.
  • the measured light detector signals may be divided by the calculated gain G(t) to remove the temperature dependency.
  • the monitor temperature T is obtained from a first temperature sensor 1106 (see FIG. 11 ) configured to monitor the temperature of the sensors 222 / 224 .
  • the bias voltage (V bias ) may be measured by the bias voltage generator 1112 .
  • the breakdown voltage (V breakdown ) and reference temperature (T 0 ) are constants specific to the particular light detector device included in the system 200 .
  • the light detectors 222 / 224 are silicon photomultiplier (SPM) devices
  • SPM silicon photomultiplier
  • V breakdown may be 24.5 V and T 0 may be 21 degrees C.
  • the coefficients C v and C T used in Eqn. (2) may be derived empirically based on measurements obtained using a constant phantom over an ambient temperature ranging from about 18 degrees C. to about 26 degrees C.
  • the temperature portion of the gain correction is determined by the Eqns. (3)-(5).
  • G useCase C v ⁇ V bias measured - V breakdown ⁇ ( 1 + C T ) T measured - T 0 Eqn . ⁇ ( 3 )
  • G nominal C v ⁇ V bias nominal - V breakdown ⁇ ( 1 + C T ) T nominal - T 0 Eqn . ⁇ ( 4 )
  • G correction G useCase G nominal Eqn . ⁇ ( 5 )
  • This gain correction can be applied to each of the signal magnitudes as measured by the first and second light detectors 222 / 224 as follows:
  • the signal magnitudes from the light detectors 222 / 224 calculated using Eqn. (1) are normalized by the monitor photodiode magnitude for each measurement set corresponding to the measurements obtained during illumination by one of the LED light sources 218 / 220 at either the excitation or emission wavelength.
  • the monitor photodiode magnitude is used for this normalization.
  • the average of the two monitor photodiode magnitudes from the corresponding measurement set is used for this normalization.
  • the in-phase intensity signal 1224 , quadrature intensity signal 1228 , and average intensity signal 1226 are further processed for the number of accumulated samples and ADC scaling such that the intensity signals 1224 / 1226 / 1228 are returned as fraction of the full range of the high-speed ADC 1102 (i.e. ranging from a minimum of 0 to a maximum of 1).
  • the measurements of the monitor photodiodes 904 / 906 are similarly scaled as a fraction of the full range of the low-speed ADC 1104 .
  • G correction may incorporate a power correction to correct for the effects of fluctuations in the LED power supply.
  • the signals from the first monitor photodiode 904 and the second monitor photodiode 906 are calibrated by measuring optical output power with a power meter as light intensities from the light sources 218 / 220 are varied.
  • the calibration coefficients for each light source 218 / 220 , C source1 and C source2 are calculated as detector-measured milliWatts per recorded monitor photodiode signal value.
  • C source1 and C source2 are used to determine the absolute light output into tissue at each wavelength.
  • the detector temperature correction module 2206 a corrects signal magnitudes for the varying intensity of the LEDs by normalizing the temperature-corrected detected signals using the LED output signal PD magnitude measured by the first monitor photodiode 904 and/or the second monitor photodiode 906 .
  • the G correction variable for each light source 218 / 220 from above is amended as follows:
  • G correction G useCase G nominal * PD magnitude Eqn . ⁇ ( 7 ) —Light Directionality Correction Module
  • the pre-processing subunit 1302 in this aspect includes a light directionality correction module 2208 configured to enable a correction to variations in the detected signals associated with differences in the scattering and absorption of light of different wavelengths through the tissues of the patient 202 during data acquisition.
  • a correction term for light directionality may be measured by acquiring data from one or more homogeneous tissue phantoms and using a sensor configuration in which no emission filters are present. The ratio of the signals detected by the first light detector 222 (Det 1 ) and the signals detected by the second light detector 224 (Det 2 ) measured are used to determine a coefficient G ex or G em for signals obtained in association with illumination by light at the excitation and emission wavelengths, respectively.
  • the coefficients are used to modify the signal detected by the first light detector 222 .
  • the correction of the signals acquired in a homogeneous medium by the first light detector 222 using the coefficients G ex or G em render the signals measured by the first and second detectors 222 / 224 , as equivalent to within 20% of one another.
  • the correction of the signals acquired in a homogeneous medium by the first light detector 222 using the coefficients G ex or G em render the signals measured by the first and second detectors 222 / 224 as equivalent to within about 10%, to within about 5%, to within about 2%, and to within about 1%.
  • the pre-processing subunit 1302 in this aspect includes a detector non-linear response correction module 2210 configured to enable a correction to variations in the detected signals associated with non-linear response of the detectors.
  • a calibration curve based on average data may be used to scale the magnitude data obtained by the detectors 222 / 224 .
  • the pre-processing subunit 1302 in this aspect includes a filter throughput temperature correction (emission) module 2212 configured to enable a correction to variations in the detected signals associated with temperature-dependent optical properties of the optical filter 244 associated with the second light detector 224 during emission-wavelength illumination.
  • the signals Det 2 detected by the second light detector 224 may be corrected according to Eqn. (8):
  • Det ⁇ ⁇ 2 Det ⁇ ⁇ 2 - Det ⁇ ⁇ 2 ⁇ ( C emF , slopeT ⁇ ( T - T nom ) ) C emF , nom Eqn . ⁇ ( 8 )
  • the signal Det 2 measured by the second light detector 224 may be monitored while ambient temperature is cycled over a range including the operating temperature range or a large enough subset of the range to adequately determine the temperature-dependence of the emission filter.
  • These data are acquired with the optical filter 244 installed on the second light detector 224 from a homogeneous, non-fluorescent phantom. Further, simultaneous measurements are monitored from the first light detector 222 , and a ratio of the measurements Det 2 /Det 1 is determined.
  • the nominal filter coefficient, C emF,nom is calculated as the nominal ratio of Det 2 /Det 1 obtained at a nominal operating temperature T nom .
  • the coefficient C emF,slopeT is obtained from the slope of Det 2 /Det 1 obtained over a range of ambient temperatures during emission-wavelength illumination of the homogeneous, non-fluorescent phantom.
  • the pre-processing subunit 1302 in this aspect includes a tissue heterogeneity correction module 2216 configured to enable a correction to variations in the detected signals associated with heterogeneity of the tissues intervening between the first region 206 illuminated by light sources 218 / 220 and the second and third regions 208 / 210 at which the light detectors 222 / 224 are positioned.
  • the signal Det 1 corrected for light directionality by the light directionality correction module 2208 and the signal Det 2 corrected for filter effects by the filter throughput temperature correction (emission) module 2212 are used to calculate C hetero , a coefficient to correct for tissue heterogeneity, according to Eqn. (9):
  • C hetero Det2/Det1 Eqn. (9) —Filter Throughput Temperature Correction (Excitation) and Signal Decomposition Module
  • the pre-processing subunit 1302 in this aspect includes a filter throughput temperature correction (excitation) module and signal decomposition module 2214 configured to enable a correction to variations in the detected signals associated with temperature-dependent optical properties of the optical filter 244 associated with the second light detector 224 during excitation-wavelength illumination.
  • the filter throughput temperature correction (excitation) module and signal decomposition module 2214 performs a correction to variance to the amount of excitation light leakthrough due to temperature-related changes in the optical properties of the optical filter 244 .
  • the filter throughput temperature correction (excitation) module and signal decomposition module 2214 enables corrections of the signals measured by the first light detector 222 during excitation-wavelength illumination due to the presence of fluorescence induced by the excitation-wavelength illumination superimposed over the portion of the signal associated with the excitation-wavelength illumination.
  • C exLT,nom is calculated from the ratio of signals Det 1 and Det 2 measured from a homogeneous, non-fluorescent phantom at the nominal operating temperature T nom during excitation-wavelength illumination.
  • C exLT,slopeT is calculated as the slope of the signal Det 2 measured from a homogeneous, non-fluorescent phantom at a range of operating temperatures T during excitation-wavelength illumination.
  • the filter throughput temperature correction (excitation) module and signal decomposition module 2214 further performs a signal extraction to isolate portions of the detected signals associated with diffuse reflectance of the excitation-wavelength illumination and fluorescence.
  • DR ex2 which is the amount of excitation light impingent on the second light detector 224 in the absence of an optical filter 244 , is not measurable, due to the presence of the optical filter 244 .
  • the signal Det 1 measured by the first light detector 222 is a composite signal from both diffuse reflectance of the excitation-wavelength illumination DR ex1 and fluorescence Flr 1 .
  • C Hetero is obtained using the tissue heterogeneity correction module 2216 as described above.
  • Flr 2 is determined by solving the above system of equations using only measurable signals Det 1 and Det 2 as demonstrated below:
  • Det 2 C exLT ⁇ C Hetero ⁇ DR ex ⁇ ⁇ 1 + Flr 2 Eqn . ⁇ ( 15 )
  • Det 2 C exLT ⁇ C Hetero ⁇ ( Det 1 - Flr 1 ) + Flr 2 Eqn . ⁇ ( 16 )
  • Det 2 C exLT ⁇ C Hetero ⁇ Det 1 - C exLT ⁇ C Hetero ⁇ Flr 1 + Flr 2 Eqn . ⁇ ( 17 )
  • Det 2 - C exLT ⁇ C Hetero ⁇ Det 1 Flr 2 ⁇ ( 1 - C exLT ) Eqn . ⁇ ( 18 )
  • Flr 2 Det 2 - C exLT ⁇ C Hetero ⁇ Det 1 1 - C exLT Eqn . ⁇ ( 19 )
  • the pre-processing subunit 1302 in this aspect includes a fractional photon normalization module 2218 configured to convert the detector signals, after preprocessing as described above, into units of fractional photons for use in subsequent background subtraction and intrinsic fluorescence correction algorithms as described herein.
  • the detector signals may be converted to photocurrent by reversing the scaling associated with the ADC and the transimpedance amplifier used to acquire the detected signals to obtain the signals in units of photocurrents.
  • a detector responsivity supplied by the light detector's manufacturer is used to convert the detector photocurrents to units of Watts.
  • the detector signals in Watts are then ratioed to the source power in Watts as measured by additional light detectors 226 used to monitor the output of the light sources 218 / 220 to obtain the number of fractional photons detected.
  • the pre-processing subunit 1302 / 1302 a in this aspect includes a fractional photon normalization module 2218 / 2218 a configured to convert the detector signals, after preprocessing as described above, into units of fractional photons for use in subsequent background subtraction and intrinsic fluorescence correction algorithms as described herein.
  • the detector signals may be converted to photocurrent by reversing the scaling associated with the ADC and the transimpedance amplifier used to acquire the detected signals to obtain the signals in units of photocurrents.
  • a detector responsivity supplied by the light detector's manufacturer is used to convert the detector photocurrents to units of Watts.
  • the detector signals in Watts are then ratioed to the source power in Watts as measured by additional light detectors 226 used to monitor the output of the light sources 218 / 220 to obtain the number of fractional photons detected.
  • the pre-processing subunit 1302 a in this aspect includes excitation light leakthrough subtraction module 2222 configured to perform an excitation leakthrough subtraction on the Flr meas signal. To arrive at a fluorescence signal due only to fluorescent photons (Flr photons ), an excitation leakthrough subtraction is performed.
  • the excitation leakthrough is taken to be a fraction of the diffuse reflectance excitation (DR ex meas ) signal, where a universal calibration factor, C ExLT , determines the fraction of the signal to subtract from Flr meas as expressed below:
  • ExLT C ExLT *DR ex meas
  • C ExLT is a calibration factor that is obtained by computing the ratio between the excitation light detected by both detectors on a non-fluorescing optical phantom as described below:
  • Flr photons Flr meas ⁇ ExLT —Fluorescence Light Leakthrough Subtraction Module
  • the pre-processing subunit 1302 a in this aspect includes a fluorescence light leakthrough subtraction module 2224 a configured to perform a fluorescence leakthrough subtraction on the Flr meas signal.
  • a fluorescence leakthrough subtraction is performed.
  • C FlrLT a calibration factor
  • C FlrLT p ⁇ ⁇ 1 * ( DRem DRemFilt ) + p ⁇ ⁇ 2
  • p1 and p2 are approximately 0.61 and 0.01, respectively, in one aspect, as determined by the above-mentioned relationship.
  • p1 and p2 may assume any other value without limitation as defined by the above relationship.
  • DR ex photons DR ex meas ⁇ Flr meas *C FlrLT b) Baseline Subtraction Subunit
  • the processing unit 236 further includes a baseline subtraction subunit 1304 .
  • the baseline subtraction subunit 1304 subtracts a baseline signal from the light detector measurements to correct for the effects of autofluorescence and light leakage.
  • the baseline period refers to an initial time period of measurements obtained prior to injection of the exogenous fluorescent agent.
  • the fluorescence signal measured by the system 200 may be assumed to associated with tissue autofluorescence and/or excitation light from the LED light sources 218 / 220 leaking through the absorption filter 244 of the second light detector 224 .
  • the average signal measured during the baseline period referred to herein as a baseline signal, may be subtracted from subsequent fluorescence measurements to yield a measurement associated solely with the fluorescence produced by the exogenous fluorescent agent within the tissues of the patient.
  • the corrections for excitation light leak-through and autofluorescence may be implemented separately.
  • a subtraction of the effects of excitation light leak-through may be performed prior to the diffuse reflectance correction described herein below, and a subtraction of the effects of autofluorescence may be performed after the diffuse reflectance correction.
  • the processing unit 236 further includes a diffuse reflectance correction subunit 1306 .
  • the diffuse reflectance correction subunit 1306 may correct the measured fluorescence data to remove the effects of changes to the optical properties (absorption and scattering) of the tissues of the patient 202 during monitoring of renal extraction of an exogenous fluorescent agent within the tissues of a patient.
  • the optical properties of the tissues may change due to any one or more factors including, but not limited to: vasodilation, vasoconstriction, oxygen saturation, hydration, edema, and any other suitable factor within the region of interest monitored by the system, associated with changes in the concentrations of endogenous chromophores such as hemoglobin and melanin.
  • the fluorescence measurements obtained by the system 200 that are used to determine renal function include emission-wavelength photons that are detected by the second (filtered) light detector 224 . These emission-wavelength photons are emitted by the exogenous fluorescence agent introduced into the tissues of the patient in response to illumination by excitation-wavelength photons. The emission-wavelength photons travel from the fluorescence source (i.e. the exogenous fluorescence agent) to the second (filtered) light detector 224 through third region 210 of the patient's skin.
  • the fluorescence source i.e. the exogenous fluorescence agent
  • the emission-wavelength light that is detected by the second (filtered) light detector 224 may also include autofluorescence emitted by endogenous fluorophores such as keratin and collagen within the tissues of the patient, as well as leak-through of excitatory-wavelength light through the optical filter 244 of the second light detector 224 .
  • the excitation-wavelength photons that induce fluorescence of the exogenous fluorescent agent are produced by the first light source 218 and are directed into the first region 206 of the patient's skin. If the optical properties of the patient's skin (scattering and/or absorption) varies over the time interval at which the detector data used to determine renal function is acquired (i.e. from a few hours to about 24 hours or more), the accuracy of the fluorescence measurements may be impacted, as discussed previously above.
  • the system 200 may direct light into the first region 206 of the patient's skin with a pulse of emission-wavelength light and a pulse of excitation-wavelength light in an alternating series and may detect all light emerging from the second region of the patients skin using the first (unfiltered) light detector 222 and a portion of the light emerging from the third region 210 of the patient's skin using the second (filtered) light detector 224 .
  • the light intensity detected by each combination of excitation and emission wavelength illumination of the first region 206 and detection by the unfiltered/filtered light detectors 222 / 224 contain information not only about the concentration of the exogenous fluorescent agent in the patient's tissues, but also information about the optical properties of the patient's skin.
  • the primary measurement of fluorescence is Flr meas , the intensity of fluorescent light measured at the filtered detector.
  • the diffuse reflectance measurement Flr meas represents the propagation of photons to the non-filtered arm and is composed primarily of excitation photons.
  • DR em and DR em,filtered represent the propagation of emission-only photons.
  • light intensity measured by the second (filtered) light detector 224 during illumination by the excitation-wavelength light captures the raw intensity of light emitted by the exogenous fluorescent agents (Flr meas ) prior to any corrections for tissue optical properties in various aspects.
  • the emission-wavelength light contained in Flr meas is assumed to originate predominantly from the exogenous fluorescent agent, with only minor contributions due to auto-fluorescence by endogenous chromophores, and is therefore termed Flr agent .
  • all autofluorescence contributions would be subtracted off during the baseline correction described herein above.
  • the remaining three light measurements enable monitoring of the optical properties of the patient's skin and provide data that may be used to adjust for any changes in the optical properties of the patient's skin.
  • the represented signals DRex meas and Flr meas which have been corrected for variations in temperature and optical output are further processed to signals attributed only to photons of the desired wavelength prior to applying a diffuse reflectance correction.
  • the number of photons due to either diffuse reflectance, excitation or fluorescence on either detector depends on light directionality and the gain of the detector at the detected wavelength, as shown below:
  • DRex meas A 1 *DRex photons +B 1 *Flr photons
  • Flr meas A 2 *DRex photons +B 2 *Flr photons
  • the coefficients A1, A2, B1, B2 are composed of a directionality and gain factor, e.g.
  • a 1 d450 SPM1 *G SPM1@450
  • a 2 A 1 ⁇ ( or ⁇ ⁇ C ExLT ) ⁇ ⁇ and ⁇ ⁇ B 1 B 2 ⁇ ( or ⁇ ⁇ C FlrLT ) can be determined experimentally to isolate Flr photons and DRex photons , respectively.
  • the table below represents the names of the signals used to represent each of the four measured signals in the diffuse reflectance correction development. Note that either of the described preprocessing paths can be followed to arrive at signals that can be used to develop the correction.
  • light intensity measured by the first (unfiltered reference) light detector 222 during illumination by excitation-wavelength light captures a measure of the diffuse reflectance of excitation-wavelength light propagated through the patient's skin (DR ex meas ).
  • the first light detector 222 is configured to detect both excitation-wavelength and emission-wavelength light
  • the intensity of the excitation-wavelength light is orders of magnitude higher than the intensity of the emission-wavelength light as a result of the lower efficiency of producing light via fluorescence.
  • the proportion of emission-wavelength light within DR ex meas is assumed to be negligible. In other aspects, the proportion of emission-wavelength light within DR ex meas is estimated and subtracted.
  • DR ex meas serves as a benchmark measurement to assess changes in the optical properties of the patient's skin with respect to the excitation-wavelength light.
  • Light intensity measured by the first (unfiltered reference) light detector 222 during illumination by emission-wavelength light captures a measure of the diffuse reflectance of emission-wavelength light propagated through the patient's skin (DR em ).
  • DR em serves as a benchmark measurement to assess changes in the optical properties of the patient's skin with respect to the emission-wavelength light.
  • DR em,filtered Light intensity measured by the second (filtered) light detector 224 during illumination by emission-wavelength light captures a second measure of the diffuse reflectance of emission-wavelength light propagated through the patient's skin (DR em,filtered ).
  • DR em,filtered is subject to the same assumptions as DR em as described herein above.
  • DR em,filtered provides a means of assessing heterogeneity of the tissue's optical properties. Because DR em,filtered is measured by the second light detector 224 configured to detect light emerging from the patient's skin at the third region 210 (see FIG.
  • the intensity of light measured in DR em,filtered has propagated along an optical path through the skin of the patient that is different from the optical path traveled by the light measured in DR em .
  • the distances of the first detector aperture 1004 and second light aperture 2006 through which light is delivered to the first and second light detectors 222 / 224 , respectively are designed to be equidistant from the light delivery aperture 1002 (see FIG. 10 )
  • any differences between DR em,filtered and DR em are assumed to be a result of heterogeneity on the optical properties of the skin traversed by the two different optical paths.
  • the intrinsic fluorescence (IF) defined here as the measured fluorescence at the emission wavelength attributable only to emission by the exogenous fluorescent agent, may be calculated according to Eqn. (20):
  • each of the diffuse reflectance correction measurement signals DR ex , DR em , and DR em,filtered factors are raised to the powers k ex , k em , and k em,filtered respectively.
  • each measurement in Table 2 is subjected to the power/temperature corrections and background subtraction corrections as described herein above (see FIGS. 22A and 22B ) before applying the diffuse reflectance correction of Eqn. (20).
  • the values of k ex , k em , and k em,filtered may be determined empirically.
  • suitable empirical methods for determining suitable values for k ex , k em , and k em,filtered include a global error map method and a linear regression method, both described in detail herein below.
  • the same set of exponents may be reused for subsequent measurements of intrinsic fluorescence.
  • Non-limiting examples of applications of the systems and methods described herein in which a set of selected exponents may be reused includes: repeated measurements on the same patient using the same sensor head 204 ; repeated measurements using the same sensor head on different patients of the same species; repeated measurements using different sensor heads with the same design on patients of the same species; repeated measurements using different sensor heads with different designs on patients of the same species; repeated measurements using different sensor heads with the different designs on patients of the different species; and any other suitable applications of the systems and methods described herein.
  • the exponents may be updated with repeated use of the systems and methods described herein.
  • new sets of exponents may be determined for each use of the system and methods, and the stored sets of exponents may be periodically or continuously evaluated to assess whether an updated selection of exponents is indicated.
  • the system may be used to conduct measurements using the previous set of exponents, a mean/median of all previous sets of exponents, or any other estimate of suitable exponents based on previous values of exponents.
  • de novo selection of exponents using one of the methods described herein below may be indicated.
  • the values of the powers used in Eqn. (20) above are determined empirically using a global error surface method.
  • FIG. 14 A flow chart illustrating the various steps of a global error surface method 1400 is illustrated in FIG. 14 .
  • the method in this aspect includes selecting ranges of values for each of the powers (k ex , k em , k em,filtered ) for each of the diffuse reflectance signals (DR ex , DR em , DR em,filtered ) are selected by a user at step 1402 .
  • the ranges of values for each of the powers may be influenced by any one or more of a variety of factors including, but not limited to: the design of the system 200 , including the design of the sensor head 204 ; the properties of the selected exogenous fluorescent agent such as excitatory/emission wavelengths, absorption efficiency, emission efficiency, and concentration of initial dose in the patient's tissues; the species of the patient 202 and corresponding concentrations of endogenous chromophores; the position of the sensor head 204 on the patient 202 ; and any other relevant factor.
  • the design of the system 200 including the design of the sensor head 204 ; the properties of the selected exogenous fluorescent agent such as excitatory/emission wavelengths, absorption efficiency, emission efficiency, and concentration of initial dose in the patient's tissues; the species of the patient 202 and corresponding concentrations of endogenous chromophores; the position of the sensor head 204 on the patient 202 ; and any other relevant factor.
  • the method may include choosing a wide range for each coefficient (k ex , k em , k em,filtered ) and conduct a broad search.
  • the error surfaces from this broad search may be analyzed to locate wells in the error surface and the associated ranges for each of the coefficients.
  • the method in this one aspect includes adapting the ranges of each coefficient to include the regions from the broad search within which wells in the error surface were observed and repeating the analysis. This method may be iterated until a suitably fine resolution is achieved that is capable of accurately capturing the minimum error.
  • the selected ranges of potential factors may be [0,2] for k ex , [0,4] for k em , and [ ⁇ 4,0] for k em,filtered .
  • step sizes may be selected at 1404 for the ranges of values selected at 1402 for each power k ex , k em , k em,filtered .
  • the step size for each factor may be selected based on any one or more of at least several factors including, but not limited to: the anticipated sensitivity of the IF values calculated by Eqn. (20) to changes in each factor; a suitable total number of combinations of powers used to calculate IF considered factors including available computational resources, acceptable data processing times, or any other relevant factors; and any other suitable criterion for step size.
  • the step sizes may be the same value for all powers k ex , k em , k em,filtered .
  • the step size for all powers may be 0.5.
  • the step sizes may be constant for all values of a single power k ex , k em , k em,filtered , but the step sizes selected for each power may be different between different powers.
  • the selected step size for k ex may be 0.01 and the selected step size for k em and k em,filtered may be 0.6.
  • the step size within one or more of the powers may vary within the range of values for each power.
  • the selected step sizes for k ex may be non-linearly distributed about the mean value.
  • the vector of potential values for k ex may be [0 0.5 0.75 0.9 1 1.1 1.25 1.5 2].
  • the step size may be reduced within subranges of values for a power for which the IF calculated by Eqn. (20) is predicted to be more sensitive to small changes in that power.
  • Non-limiting examples of suitable varying step sizes within a range of values for a single power include: different step sizes selected by a user, random step sizes, a linear increase and/or decrease in step size, a non-linear distribution of different step sizes such as a logarithmic distribution, an exponential distribution, or any other suitable non-linear distribution of step sizes.
  • the ranges of exponents selected at 1402 may be used to form vectors of potential values of k ex , k em , k em,filtered at 1406 .
  • the vectors created at 1406 are:
  • IF is calculated from the measurements Flr, DR ex , DR em , and DR em,filtered at 1408 using Eqn. (20).
  • a plurality of IF values are calculated at 1408 in which each IF value corresponds to one of the data acquisition cycles (i.e. a single sequence of emission-wavelength illumination followed by excitatory-wavelength illumination as illustrated in FIG. 5 ).
  • a total of 405 (5*9*9) pluralities of IF signals would be calculated.
  • the plurality of combinations of potential exponents may be evaluated to select one combination of exponents from the plurality to assign for use in subsequent diffuse reflectance corrections calculated using Eqn. (20).
  • an estimate of error of the corrected Flr signal data i.e. IF signal data calculated using Eqn. (20)
  • Any estimate of error may be calculated at 1410 including, but not limited to, a quantity related to residuals of the IF signal data relative to a curve fit of the IF signal data.
  • Any type of known curve-fitting method may be used to curve-fit the IF signal data including, but not limited to, a single-exponential curve fit. Without being limited to any particular theory, it is thought that the rate of clearance of an exogenous fluorescent agent, such as MB-102, from the kidneys is expected to be a constant exponential decay characterized by the renal decay time constant RDTC.
  • a subset of the Flr signals corresponding to the post-agent administration period 1508 / 1510 may be selected to estimate an error for each combination of exponents used to calculate the IF signals using Eqn. (20) against a reference curve, including, but not limited to, a curve obtained using plasma measurements.
  • the post-agent administration period includes the period after injection in which the exogenous fluorescent agent has undergone sufficient diffusion from the blood into the extracellular fluid space throughout the patient so that the decay of the fluorescence is representative of clearance of the agent by the kidneys.
  • the post-agent administration period 1508 / 1510 of the Flr measurements may be selected by any suitable method without limitation.
  • suitable methods for identifying a post-agent administration period include: selection via inspection by a user and an automated selection method such as the equilibration detection method enabled by the equilibrium selection subunit 1308 as described in detail herein below.
  • FIG. 15 is a graph of fluorescence measurements obtained from a patient over a period of about 10 hours after injection of an exogenous fluorescence agent (MB-102) after a pre-injection period of about 3 hours.
  • the pre-injection/baseline period 1502 is characterized by a relatively low and stable fluorescence level, likely due the absence of endogenous fluorescent agent in the blood of the patient.
  • the fluorescence measurements exhibit a sharp increase 1504 to a peak concentration 1506 , followed by a relatively smooth exponential decrease 1508 back to background fluorescence levels as the kidneys eliminate the exogenous fluorescence agent from the blood of the patient.
  • FIG. 16 is an enlargement of the graph of FIG. 15 showing a comparison of the measured fluorescence data to a linear curve fit 1604 to the log of the IF signal within a portion of the post-equilibrium period 1510 , demonstrating the close fit of the single-exponential curve-fit to the IF signal data.
  • the log of the calculated IF signal value may be fit with a line and an error of the curve fit relative to the individual IF values may be compared to the IF signals calculated using Eqn. (20) for each of the plurality of combinations of exponents to calculate the error at 1410 .
  • Any statistical summary parameter suitable for quantifying the error of the single-exponent curve fit and the corresponding IF signal values may be used without limitation including, but not limited to: root mean square (RMS) error, average absolute deviation, mean signed deviation, mean squared deviation, and any other suitable statistical summary parameter.
  • the calculated error at 1410 may be the normalized RMS error of the linear fit of the log(IF) signals.
  • the normalized RMS error calculated at 1410 is a single numerical quantity to facilitate the subsequent selection of a single combination of exponents from the plurality of combinations identified at 1406 .
  • the method 1400 includes selecting a single combination of exponents at 1412 from among the plurality of combinations for which IF was calculated at 1408 .
  • the combination of exponents associated with a calculated IF signal that minimizes the error calculated at 1410 is best suited for correcting the measured Flr signals to remove the effects of variation in the optical properties of the patient's skin during data acquisition within the post-agent administration period 1508 / 1510 .
  • any known method of identifying the combination of exponents may be used without limitation including, but not limited to, selecting the single combinations of exponents from a map of all error values corresponding to all combinations of exponents.
  • the plurality of error values corresponding to the plurality of combinations of exponents may be transformed into an error map comprising a three-dimensional volume in which each of the three dimensions corresponds to the powers used in Eqn. (20): k ex , k em , and k em,filtered , respectively.
  • each error value corresponding to one of the combinations of exponents is mapped to a coordinate (k ex1 , k em1 , and k em,filtered1 ) within the three-dimensional volume, where k ex1 , k em1 , and k em,filtered1 are the numerical values for one combination of exponents.
  • each error values may be mapped to the three-dimensional volume in any known format including, but not limited to: a number, a color, a greyscale value, and any other suitable format.
  • the three-dimensional map of error values described above may be transformed into a plurality of error surfaces corresponding to a planar map of the error values associated with a single value of one of the powers k ex , k em , and k em,filtered , with the full numerical range of the remaining two exponents acting as a horizontal axis and a vertical axis of the error map.
  • FIG. 17 is an error map of the normalized RMS errors of the single-exponential curve-fits of the calculated IF signals maps to the full ranges of k em,filtered (horizontal axis) and k ex (vertical axis) at a constant value of k em in which the normalized RMS errors are represented as colors on the error map.
  • the normalized RMS value calculated for each coefficient may be normalized according to Eqn. (21):
  • the global error map method of determining the powers to be used in the correction for variation in skin optical properties by analyzing a single measurement set as described herein above.
  • the global error map method may analyze and combine multiple measurement datasets for multiple individuals obtained using the same system and/or sensor head.
  • the global error map method may analyze multiple measurement datasets from multiple individuals obtained using multiple systems and sensor heads.
  • the powers to be used in the correction according to Eqn. (20) may be determined for each measurement of each individual.
  • the powers to be used may be obtained using at least several different measurement datasets and the powers so obtained may be stored for subsequent use for measurement datasets obtained from a new individual and or obtained using a different system and/or sensor.
  • the projection across each of the error surfaces (a k em,filtered -k ex projection, a k em,filtered -k em projection, and a k em -k ex projection) may be inspected to determine whether the power ranges defined at 1402 were adequate.
  • the error surface may be inspected to confirm that the map includes a clearly defined minimum value.
  • the ranges of one or more power vales may be revised and the method 1400 may be repeated.
  • an assessment of the optical properties of the skin of the patient e.g. melanin absorbance, blood content, and/or scattering coefficient
  • the combination of exponents k ex , k em , and k em,filtered may be stored and used for subsequent measurements conducted by the system 200 .
  • FIG. 18 is a graph comparing the raw fluorescence signal (blue line) to the calculated IF signal (red line) for a measurement data set.
  • a global correction may be calculated by combining measurements obtained using a plurality of different systems and/or sensor heads and identifying the combination of exponents corresponding to an overall minimum error value.
  • the values of the power coefficients used in Eqn. (20) above are determined empirically using a linear regression method.
  • a flow chart illustrating the various steps of the linear regression method of obtaining a correction in the form of a regression equation with predictor variables (DR ex ,DR em ,DR em,filtered ) is provided in FIG. 19 .
  • the method 1900 may include log transforming Flr to log (Fir) to prepare the raw fluorescence measurements Flr for analysis at 1902 .
  • FIG. 20 is a graph of log (Fir) produced at 1902 .
  • the method 1900 may further include selecting a region of stable optical properties 2002 (see FIG. 20 ) in an aspect, In this aspect, regions of stable optical properties 2002 typically correspond to linear segments on the graph of log (Fir) as shown in FIG. 20 .
  • the method 1900 further includes obtaining a linear regression model 2004 within the region of stable optical properties 2002 at 1906 .
  • the linear regression model 2004 may be obtained using any regression method without limitation including, but not limited to, a multi-variable linear regression modeling method.
  • the method 1900 may further include extending the linear regression model 2004 obtained within the region of stable optical properties 2002 to produce an extended linear regression 2008 extending into a region of variable optical properties 2010 at 1908 .
  • the region of variable optical properties 2010 is characterized by a non-linear profile within the graph of log (Fir) as illustrated in FIG. 20 .
  • the method 1900 may further include obtaining a linear regression model 2004 with predictor variables Flr, DR ex , DR em , and DR em,filtered at 1910 and the linear curve fit 2004 as the predicted response.
  • the extension of the linear regression 2008 produced at 1908 may be used to train the linear regression model obtained at 1910 .
  • the linear regression model may be developed using a measurement data set obtained from a single individual and/or a single system and sensor head in one aspect. In another aspect, the linear regression model may be developed using multiple measurement datasets obtained from multiple individuals and/or multiple systems and sensor heads. In some aspects, a linear regression model may be developed de novo for each new measurement data set obtained for an individual. In at least some other aspects, the constants and parameters characterizing a linear regression model developed as described herein above may be stored for subsequent use in lieu of developing a linear regression model de novo for each measurement data set obtained as described herein above.
  • the processing unit 236 of the controller 212 may further include a fault detection subunit 1312 configured to monitor the function of the light sources 218 / 220 and light detectors 222 / 224 and to inform the user of any irregularities of any detected faults within the system 200 via the display unit 216 .
  • the fault detection subunit 1312 may enable the basic identification of fault and notice states by examining the signal levels received from the light sources 218 / 220 and light detectors 222 / 224 and associated additional temperature sensors 228 and additional light detectors 226 of the sensor head 204 (see FIG. 2 ).
  • the signal magnitudes see Eqn.
  • the nadir of the signal may be used to monitor ambient light levels in one aspect. Without being limited to any particular theory, additional contributions to the nadir levels of the modulated signals, such as amplifier DC offset, may be neglected as small and constant relative to the contributions of ambient light leakage. In an aspect, if the detected ambient light levels register in excess of about one quarter of the high-speed ADC 1102 range at low detector amplifier gain, an ambient light notice is issued to the user via the display unit 216 .
  • saturation of the light detectors 222 / 224 detectors may also be monitored by the fault detection subunit 1312 .
  • the saturation may be monitored by calculating the peak value of the signal, defined herein as the average signal value plus half the peak-to-peak signal. If the signal's peak value falls within is within 5% of saturation of the ADC range, the fault detection subunit 1312 may issue a saturation notice to the user via the display unit 216 . If saturation event is detected by the fault detection subunit 1312 , the ambient light level may then be checked to determine if the saturation event is associated with ambient light saturation, defined herein as a saturation event occurring concurrently with an ambient light notice as described herein above.
  • the fault detection subunit 1312 issues an ambient light saturation notice to the user via the display unit 216 , and data acquisition by the acquisition unit 234 is continued in this notice state to allow the user to resolve the condition. If a saturation event is detected that is not associated with an excess of ambient light, the fault detection unit may signal the light detector control unit 232 to perform an adjustment of detector gain and/or may signal the light source control unit 230 to perform an adjustment to the LED current source 1126 to adjust LED intensity. In various aspects, the fault detection unit issues a notification to the user via the display unit to report either the ambient light saturation event, or the saturation event not associated with an excess of ambient light. In some aspects, if a saturation event is detected, but the automatic gain adjustment has been disabled by a user when the system 200 is configured in the Engineering Mode as described herein above, the user is also notified via the display unit.
  • the processing unit 236 may further include a post-agent administration selection subunit 1308 configured to automatically identify the portion of the measurement data set that corresponds to the post-agent administration period 1508 / 1510 (see FIG. 15 ).
  • a post-agent administration selection subunit 1308 configured to automatically identify the portion of the measurement data set that corresponds to the post-agent administration period 1508 / 1510 (see FIG. 15 ).
  • the exogenous fluorescent agent undergoes an equilibration period of diffusion from the bloodstream into the rest of the extracellular tissues of the patient.
  • the temporal profile of the fluorescence signal Flr may be characterized as a two-exponential signal profile described by Eqn.
  • IF pre-equilibration C 0 +C 1 e ⁇ t/ ⁇ 1 +C 2 e ⁇ t/ ⁇ 2 Eqn. (22) in which C 0 is the baseline signal that is typically removed by baseline subtraction as described herein above.
  • post-equilibration period 1510 is achieved and the fluorescence signal may be characterized as a linear decay.
  • the post-equilibration region of the measurement data set is assumed to be characterized as a region of the IF temporal profile that, when log-transformed, is well-described by a linear equation.
  • the post-agent administration selection subunit 1308 may identify the post-agent administration period 1510 automatically by performing a single-exponent curve fit at different portions of the IF data set and analyzing the associated curve fitting errors for each of the different portions. In various aspects, the post-agent administration selection subunit 1308 may select the earliest-occurring portion of the IF data set in which the curve-fit error associated with a single-exponent curve fit falls below a threshold value as the initial post-agent administration portion of the IF data set suitable for data correction and analysis as described herein above.
  • any analysis method suitable for comparing curve-fit errors association with single-exponential curve fits of different portions of the IF data set may be used in the post-agent administration selection subunit 1308 including, but not limited to, linear curve-fitting portions of the IF data set falling within overlapping or non-overlapping data windows and comparing the curve-fit errors of the corresponding data windows.
  • the post-agent administration selection subunit 1308 may produce at least one signal configured to signal the time range within the IF data set corresponding to the post-agent administration period 1508 / 1510 to the diffuse reflectance correction subunit 1306 and/or RDTC calculation subunit 1310 to enable the selection of a suitable portion of the IF data set to correct and analyze as disclosed herein.
  • a linear fit and a 2-exponential fits to the IF data may be compared.
  • equilibration may be identified as complete once the fitting error is equivalent (corrected for the extra degrees of freedom in the 2-exponential fit).
  • the system 200 is configured to transform the various measurements from the light detectors 222 / 224 and associated light sources 218 / 220 and other thermal and light sensors into a corrected intrinsic fluorescent (IF) signal corresponding to the detected fluorescence attributable solely to emission of fluorescence by the exogenous fluorescent agent at the emission wavelength in response to illumination by light at the excitatory wavelength.
  • IF intrinsic fluorescent
  • the exponential decrease of the IF signals during the post-agent administration portion of the IF data set may be analyzed to monitor and quantify renal function.
  • the exponential decrease of the IF signals during the post-agent administration portion of the IF data set may be transformed into a glomerular filtration rate (GFR) configured to quantify renal function.
  • the exponential decrease of the IF signals during the post-equilibration portion of the IF data set may be transformed into a renal decay time constant (RDTC), also configured to quantify renal function.
  • the exponential decrease of the IF signals during the post-equilibration portion of the IF data set may be transformed into a renal decay rate, also configured to quantify renal function.
  • the processing unit 236 may further include an RDTC calculation subunit 1310 configured to automatically transform the IF signals into a renal decay time constant (RDTC).
  • RDTC renal decay time constant
  • may be calculated by performing a linear regression on the log-transformed IF signal data (log (IF)), as described in Eqn. (24):
  • the RDTC calculation subunit 1310 may produce signals configured to produce a display of the calculated RDTC using the display unit 216 .
  • the display of the calculated RDTC may be provided to the display unit 216 in any suitable format including, but not limited to: a graph of RDTC as a function of time, a single discrete RDTC value, a table of RDTC values as a function of time, a color-coded display or other graphical representation configured to specific whether the calculated RDTC may be classified as normal/healthy, abnormal, high, low, and any other suitable classification.
  • any of the graphical formats described above may be continuously or non-continuously updates as additional data is obtained and analyzed.
  • the RDTC calculation subunit 1310 may calculate RDTC as described herein above within non-overlapping and/or overlapping windows within the IF data set.
  • the RDTC calculation subunit 1310 may convert RDTC into glomerular filtration rate (GFR) using known methods.
  • RDTC may be inverted and multiplied by a slope, resulting in cGFR, a prediction of GFR that may be corrected for body size (e.g. body surface area, or volume of distribution).
  • the controller 212 of the system 200 may further include a memory 242 configured to facilitate data storage in the system 200 .
  • the memory 242 includes a plurality of storage components such as, but not limited to, a hard disk drive, flash memory, random access memory, and a magnetic or optical disk.
  • the memory 242 may include remote storage such a server in communication with the controller 212 .
  • the memory 242 stores at least one computer program that, when received by the at least one processor, cause the at least one processor to perform any of the functions of the controller 212 described above.
  • the memory 242 may be or contain a computer-readable medium, such as a floppy disk device, a hard disk device, an optical disk device, or a tape device, a flash memory or other similar solid state memory device, or an array of devices, including devices in a storage area network or other configurations.
  • a computer program product can be tangibly embodied in an information carrier.
  • the computer program product may also contain instructions that, when executed, perform one or more functions, such as those described herein.
  • the information carrier may be a non-transitory computer- or machine-readable medium, such as the memory 242 or memory on the processor 238 .
  • the system 200 may record raw measurements and processed data to a series of files.
  • Each file may contain a header, which contains information about the operator, instrument, and session.
  • Each experimental session records a set of files into a separate folder for each sensor head used in that session.
  • the raw data file may contains in-phase, quadrature, and average measurements from the detectors and monitors during the active periods of both the excitation wavelength and the emission wavelength LEDs, along with the gain settings of the LEDs and detectors at the time of data acquisition.
  • the processed data file may contain the fluorescence and diffuse reflectance measurements after magnitude calculation and correction for the monitor readings, along with the gain settings of the LEDs and detectors.
  • the intrinsic fluorescence data file may contain the intrinsic fluorescence measurements resulting from the diffuse reflectance correction of the raw fluorescence signals.
  • the GFR file may contain the calculated GFR as a function of time, classified to indicate whether post-equilibration has occurred, along with confidence bounds.
  • the telemetry file may contain the temperature and voltage measurements.
  • the event record file may contain both user and automatically generated event records.
  • the controller 212 may include a GUI unit 240 configured to receive a plurality of signals encoding various measured and transformed data from other units of the system in various aspects.
  • the GUI unit may be configured to produce signals configured to operate the display unit 216 in order to display data, frames, forms, and/or any other communications of information between the user and the system 200 .
  • the controller 212 may further include a processor 238 .
  • the processor 238 may include any type of conventional processor, microprocessor, or processing logic that interprets and executes instructions.
  • the processor 238 may be configured to process instructions for execution within the controller 212 , including instructions stored in the memory 242 to display graphical information for a GUI on an external input/output device, such as display unit 216 coupled to a high speed interface.
  • multiple processors and/or multiple buses may be used, as appropriate, along with multiple memories and types of memory.
  • multiple controllers 212 may be connected, with each device providing portions of the necessary operations to enable the functions of the system 200 .
  • the processor 238 may include the acquisition unit 234 , the light detector control unit 232 , the light source control unit 230 , and/or the processing unit 236 .
  • a processor such as the processor 238 may include any programmable system including systems using micro-controllers, reduced instruction set circuits (RISC), application specific integrated circuits (ASICs), logic circuits, and any other circuit or processor capable of executing the functions described herein.
  • RISC reduced instruction set circuits
  • ASICs application specific integrated circuits
  • logic circuits and any other circuit or processor capable of executing the functions described herein.
  • the above examples are example only, and are thus not intended to limit in any way the definition and/or meaning of the term “processor.”
  • computing devices and computer systems include a processor and a memory.
  • any processor in a computer device referred to herein may also refer to one or more processors wherein the processor may be in one computing device or a plurality of computing devices acting in parallel.
  • any memory in a computer device referred to herein may also refer to one or more memories wherein the memories may be in one computing device or a plurality of computing devices acting in parallel.
  • the operation unit 214 may be configured to enable a user to interface (e.g., visual, audio, touch, button presses, stylus taps, etc.) with the controller 212 to control the operation of the system 200 .
  • the operation unit 214 may be further coupled to each sensor head 204 to control the operation of each sensor head 204 .
  • the system 200 may further include a display unit 216 configured to enable a user to view data and control information of the system 200 .
  • the display unit 216 may further be coupled to other components of the system 200 such as the sensor head 204 .
  • the display unit 216 may include a visual display such as a cathode ray tube (CRT) display, liquid crystal display (LCD), light emitting diode (LED) display, or “electronic ink” display.
  • the display unit 216 may be configured to present a graphical user interface (e.g., a web browser and/or a client application) to the user.
  • a graphical user interface may include, for example, an display for GFR values as described herein above as produced by the system 200 , and operational data of the system 200
  • an ideal GFR agent would not be reabsorbed nor secreted by the renal tubule, would exhibit negligible binding to plasma proteins, and would have very low toxicity.
  • a balance was struck between photophysical properties, and the molecular size and hydrophilicity of the fluorophore.
  • hydrophobic cyanine and indocyanine dyes absorb and emit optimally within the near infrared (NIR) biological window (700-900 nm)
  • hydrophilicity is not sufficiently high to function as pure GFR agents. Smaller dye molecules may be more easily converted to the extremely hydrophilic species required for renal clearance, but the limited 7 C-systems resulting from these lower molecular weight compounds generally enable one photon excitation and emission in the ultraviolet (UV).
  • UV ultraviolet
  • PEG substitution maybe used to increase hydrophilicity and solubility, reduce toxicity, and modulate aggregation of the resulting pyrazine derivatives. Variations of molecular weight and architecture (and hence hydrodynamic volume) in a series of moderately sized PEG-pyrazine derivatives may also be suitable for use as endogenous fluorescent agents.
  • the exogenous fluorescent agent is MB-102.
  • a system similar to the system 200 described herein above was used to monitor the fluorescence produced during the renal elimination of an exogenous fluorescent agent, MB-102, using the methods described herein above, in particular the diffuse reflectance data correction method.
  • FIG. 21A is a graph summarizing the changes in the magnitude of the raw fluorescence signal (Flr) just prior to injection of the MB-102 fluorescent agent into a pig and for about six hours post-injection. During the post-equilibration portion, corresponding to a time of about 13:45 in FIG.
  • the pig was subjected to a series of perturbations selected to vary the optical properties of the pig's skin and/or underlying tissues: administration of blood pressure medications to induce vasodilation/vasorestriction 2102 , application of pressure to compress the tissue 2104 , lateral movement of the sensor head 2106 , SpO 2 decrease 2108 , SpO 2 decrease 2110 , remove/replace sensor head 2112 / 2114 , and skin cooling 2116 .
  • FIG. 21B is a graph summarizing the corrected intrinsic fluorescence signal (IF) corrected as described herein above with no baseline subtraction. At time points later than 2 hours after agent injection, the time course of the IF signal was characterized by the expected single-exponential decay of the signal, with attenuated variation due to the applied perturbations.
  • IF intrinsic fluorescence signal
  • Table 4 summarizes the specific effects of the diffuse reflectance data correction method on the Flr data associated with each individual perturbation:
  • FIG. 21C is a graph summarizing the detected diffuse reflectance signals DR em,filtered , DR em , and DR ex substituted into Eqn. (20) to determine the diffuse reflectance correction of the raw Flr signal as described herein above.
  • the DR em , filtered signal was the most sensitive to the various perturbations.
  • the DR em , and DR ex signals exhibited modest variation in response to the perturbations.
  • FIG. 23 is a perspective view of a sensor head 204 a in another aspect.
  • the sensor head 204 a includes a housing 600 a formed from an upper housing 602 a and a flared lower housing 604 a .
  • the surface area of the lower housing 604 a expands to form an enlarged bottom surface 608 a .
  • the housing 600 a further includes a cable opening 806 a formed through the upper housing 602 a.
  • FIG. 24 is a bottom view of the sensor head 204 a showing the bottom surface 608 a of the housing 600 a .
  • the bottom surface 608 a may include an aperture plate 702 a including one or more apertures 704 a configured to transmit light between the skin of the patient and the light sources and light detectors contained inside the housing 600 .
  • the apertures 704 a include a light delivery aperture 1002 a configured to deliver illumination produced by the first and second light sources 218 / 220 to tissues of the patient 202 , as well as first and second detector apertures 1004 / 1006 configured to receive light from the tissues of the patient 202 .
  • the bottom surface 608 a enables the positioning of the apertures 704 a beneath a relatively large area obscured from ambient light conditions by the bottom surface 608 a .
  • This reduction of scattered ambient light entering the first and second detector apertures 1004 / 1006 reduces noise introduced into the light intensity measurements obtained by the first and second light detectors 222 / 224 .
  • the bottom surface 608 a of the housing 600 a may be attached the patient's skin using a biocompatible and transparent adhesive material 610 a including, but not limited to, a clear double-sided medical grade adhesive, as illustrated in FIG. 24 .
  • the transparent adhesive material 610 a may be positioned on the bottom surface 608 a such that the adhesive material 610 a covers the apertures 704 a.
  • FIG. 25 is an isometric view of the sensor head 204 a with the upper housing 602 a and various electrical components removed to expose an inner housing 2502 .
  • FIG. 26 is an exploded view of the inner housing 2502 and associated electrical components illustrated in FIG. 25 .
  • the inner housing 2502 is contained within the housing 600 a and is mounted to the lower housing 608 a .
  • the inner housing 2502 contains a sensor mount 912 with a first detection well 908 , a second detection well 910 , and a light source well 902 formed therethrough.
  • the first light detector 222 is mounted within the first detection well 908 and the second light detector 224 is mounted within the second detection well 910 .
  • the first and second light sources 218 / 220 are mounted within the light source well 902 .
  • the first detection well 908 , second detection well 910 , and light source well 902 of the sensor mount 912 are optically isolated from one another to ensure that light from the light sources 218 / 220 does not reach the light detectors 222 / 224 without coupling through the skin of the patient 202 .
  • the separation between the two detection wells 908 / 910 ensures that the detected fluorescence signal from the exogenous fluorescent agent is distinguishable from the unfiltered excitation light, as described in detail above.
  • the inner housing 2502 includes a first detection aperture 2602 , second detection aperture 2604 , and light source aperture 2606 .
  • the sensor mount 912 is coupled to the inner housing 2502 so that the first detection aperture 2602 , second detection aperture 2604 , and light source aperture 2606 are aligned with the first detection well 908 , second detection well 910 , and light source well 902 of the sensor mount 912 , respectively.
  • optically transparent windows 2610 , 2612 , and 2614 are coupled within first detection aperture 2602 , second detection aperture 2604 , and light source aperture 2606 , respectively, to seal the apertures while also providing optically transparent conduits between the tissues and the interior of the sensor head 204 a .
  • diffusers 2616 , 2618 , and 2620 are coupled over optically transparent windows 2610 , 2612 , and 2614 , respectively.
  • the diffusers 2616 , 2618 , and 2620 are provided to spatially homogenize light delivered to the tissues by light sources 218 / 220 and to spatially homogenize light detected by light detectors 222 / 224 .
  • the absorption filter 244 is coupled to the diffuser 2616 .
  • an optically transparent adhesive is used to couple the absorption filter 244 is coupled to the diffuser 2616 .

Landscapes

  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Spectroscopy & Molecular Physics (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • Biomedical Technology (AREA)
  • Heart & Thoracic Surgery (AREA)
  • Medical Informatics (AREA)
  • Molecular Biology (AREA)
  • Surgery (AREA)
  • Pathology (AREA)
  • Biophysics (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Physiology (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Artificial Intelligence (AREA)
  • Computer Vision & Pattern Recognition (AREA)
  • Psychiatry (AREA)
  • Urology & Nephrology (AREA)
  • Optics & Photonics (AREA)
  • Evolutionary Computation (AREA)
  • Fuzzy Systems (AREA)
  • Mathematical Physics (AREA)
  • Investigating, Analyzing Materials By Fluorescence Or Luminescence (AREA)
  • Measurement Of The Respiration, Hearing Ability, Form, And Blood Characteristics Of Living Organisms (AREA)
  • Investigating Materials By The Use Of Optical Means Adapted For Particular Applications (AREA)
  • Investigating Or Analysing Materials By Optical Means (AREA)

Abstract

A method of monitoring a time-varying fluorescence signal emitted from a fluorescent agent from within a medium with time-varying optical properties is provided that includes providing a measurement data set that includes a plurality of measurement entries that include at least two measurements obtained from a patient before and after administration of the fluorescent agent. The measurements may include one or more of: a DRex signal detected by an unfiltered light detector during illumination by excitatory-wavelength light from first region adjacent to the diffuse reflecting medium; a Flr signal detected by a filtered light detector during illumination by excitatory-wavelength light; and a DRem signal detected by the unfiltered light detector during illumination by emission-wavelength light. The method further includes identifying a post-agent administration portion of the measurement data set; and transforming each Flr signal to an IF signal representing a detected fluorescence intensity emitted solely by the fluorescent agent.

Description

CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATION
This application is a continuation of U.S. application Ser. No. 15/884,365, filed on Jan. 30, 2018, which claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Application No. 62/452,025 filed Jan. 30, 2017, the entire contents of which are hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety.
BACKGROUND OF THE DISCLOSURE
The present disclosure relates generally to methods for non-invasive monitoring of a fluorescent tracer agent within a medium characterized by scattering and/or absorption of light. More particularly, the present disclosure relates to methods for non-invasive assessment of kidney function by monitoring the clearance of an exogenous fluorescent tracer within the tissues of a patient in vivo.
Dynamic monitoring of renal function in patients at the bedside in real time is highly desirable in order to minimize the risk of acute renal failure brought on by various clinical, physiological and pathological conditions. It is particularly important in the case of critically ill or injured patients because a large percentage of these patients face the risk of multiple organ failure (MOF) incited by one or more severe dysfunctions, such as: acute lung injury (ALI), adult respiratory distress syndrome (ARDS), hypermetabolism, hypotension, persistent inflammation, and/or sepsis. Renal function may also be impaired due to kidney damage associated with administration of nephrotoxic drugs as part of a procedure such as angiography, diabetes, auto-immune disease, and other dysfunctions and/or insults causally linked to kidney damage. In order to assess a patient's status and to monitor the severity and/or progression of renal function over extended periods, there exists considerable interest in developing a simple, accurate, and continuous method for the determination of renal failure, preferably by non-invasive procedures.
Serum creatinine concentration, an endogenous marker of renal function, is typically measured from a blood sample and used, in combination with patient demographic factors such as weight, age, and/or ethnicity to estimate glomerular filtration rate (GFR), one measure of renal function. However, creatinine-based assessments of renal function may be prone to inaccuracies due to many potential factors, including: age, state of hydration, renal perfusion, muscle mass, dietary intake, and many other anthropometric and clinical variables. To compensate for these variances, a series of creatinine-based equations (most recently extended to cystatin C) have been developed which incorporate factors such as sex, race and other relevant factors for the estimation of glomerular filtration rate (eGFR) based on serum creatinine measurements. However, these eGFR equations are not provided with any means of compensating for most of the above sources of variance, and therefore have relatively poor accuracy. Further, the eGFR method typically yields results that lag behind true GFR by up to 72 hrs.
Exogenous marker compounds, such as inulin, iothalamate, 51Cr-EDTA, Gd-DTPA and 99mTc-DTPA have been used in existing methods for measuring GFR. Other endogenous markers, such as 123I and 125I labeled o-iodohippurate or 99mTc-MAG3 have been used to in other existing methods for assessing the tubular secretion process. However, the use of typical exogenous marker compounds may be accompanied by various undesirable effects including the introduction of radioactive materials and/or ionizing radiation into the patient, and laborious ex vivo handling of blood and urine samples, rendering existing methods using these exogenous markers unsuitable for real-time monitoring of renal function at a patient's bedside.
The availability of a real-time, accurate, repeatable measure of renal excretion rate using exogenous markers under patient-specific yet potentially changing circumstances would represent a substantial improvement over any currently practiced method. Moreover, a method that depends solely on the renal elimination of an exogenous chemical entity would provide a direct and continuous pharmacokinetic measurement requiring less subjective interpretation based upon age, muscle mass, blood pressure, etc.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
The patent or application file contains at least one drawing executed in color. Copies of this patent or patent application publication with color drawing(s) will be provided by the Office upon request and payment of the necessary fee.
The disclosure will be better understood, and features, aspects and advantages other than those set forth above will become apparent when consideration is given to the following detailed description thereof. Such detailed description makes reference to the following drawings, wherein:
FIG. 1 is a schematic illustration of a single-wavelength renal monitoring device in one aspect;
FIG. 2 is a schematic illustration of a dual-wavelength renal monitoring system in one aspect;
FIG. 3 is a graph summarizing the absorption, transmission, and emission spectra of various devices, materials, and compounds associated with the non-invasive monitoring of an exogenous fluorescent agent in vivo defined over light wavelengths ranging from about 430 nm to about 650 nm;
FIG. 4 is a graph summarizing the absorption spectra of oxyhemoglobin (HbO2) and deoxyhemoglobin (Hb) defined over light wavelengths ranging from about 200 nm to about 650 nm;
FIG. 5 is a schematic illustration of the timing of light pulse cycles associated with data acquisition by a dual-wavelength renal monitoring system in one aspect, in which each light pulse cycle includes light pulses produced at the excitation wavelength and at the emission wavelength in sequence;
FIG. 6 is a side view of a sensor head of a renal function monitoring system in one aspect;
FIG. 7 is a bottom view of the sensor head of FIG. 6;
FIG. 8 is a top interior view of the sensor head of FIG. 6 illustrating an arrangement of various electrical components within a housing of a sensor head of a renal function monitoring system in one aspect;
FIG. 9 is an enlargement of the interior view of FIG. 8;
FIG. 10 is a schematic illustration of the apertures formed within a contact surface of a sensor head of a renal function monitoring system in one aspect;
FIG. 11 is a schematic illustration of synchronous detection of light by a light detector of a sensor head in one aspect;
FIG. 12 is a schematic illustration of light signal modulation and demodulation by the sensor head in one aspect;
FIG. 13 is a block diagram illustrating the subunits of a processing unit in one aspect;
FIG. 14A is a flow chart illustrating the steps of a global error mapping method of determining the parameters of a diffuse reflectance correction equation in one aspect;
FIG. 14B is a flow chart illustrating the steps of a global error mapping method of determining the parameters of a diffuse reflectance correction equation in a second aspect;
FIG. 15A is a graph of representative intrinsic fluorescence measurements of the fluorescent agent (IFagent) detected by a renal monitoring device obtained before and after injection of an exogenous fluorescent agent. A subset of the data selected for analysis to determine correction factors are shown highlighted in orange.
FIG. 15B is a graph of representative intrinsic fluorescence measurements of the fluorescent agent (IFagent) detected by a renal monitoring device obtained before and after injection of an exogenous fluorescent agent. A subset of the data selected for analysis by fitting the IFagent to a plasma-derived IFagent to determine correction factors are shown highlighted in orange.
FIG. 16 is a graph comparing the log-transformed single-exponential curve fit of the corrected fluorescence signal measurements (log[Fit], black dashed line) and the corrected fluorescence signal measurements from FIG. 15 (IFagent, red line) over a portion of the selected analysis region from FIG. 15.
FIG. 17 is a map of a representative error surface summarizing normalized root-mean-square errors (RMSE, color scale) calculated for the difference between the linear fit to the log of the fluorescence and the corrected fluorescence signal measurements for a range of correction factors kex and kem,filtered, with a minimum RSME region identified by a white arrow overlaid on the map;
FIG. 18 is a graph comparing raw (F, blue line) fluorescence signal measurements and corrected (IF, red line) fluorescence signal measurements obtained before and after injection of an exogenous fluorescent agent.
FIG. 19 is a flow chart summarizing the steps of a linear regression model method of determining the parameters of a diffuse reflectance correction equation in one aspect;
FIG. 20 is a graph of log-transformed raw fluorescence signal (Log(Flr)) showing the regions of the data used as project fits for: a linear regression model used to develop a data correction algorithm (orange line), the response variable for the linear regression model (black dashed line), and the region of highly varying data used to train the linear regression model (blue line);
FIG. 21A is a graph of raw fluorescence signal measurements obtained before and after injection of an exogenous fluorescent agent. Measurements of raw fluorescence signals were obtained during exposure to various perturbations denoted as colored regions starting at about 13:50 hours. The various perturbations included variations in blood oxygenation in the test subject, application and removal of pressure to the measured region, administration of blood pressure medication to the test subject, cooling of the measured region, and removal/replacement of the sensor head of the device;
FIG. 21B is a graph of corrected fluorescence signal measurements of FIG. 21A;
FIG. 21C is a graph of diffuse reflectance signal measurements measured simultaneously with the raw fluorescence signal measurements of FIG. 21A. These signals are used in the correction of the raw fluorescence signal measurements of FIG. 21A to produce the corrected signal shown in FIG. 21B;
FIG. 22A is a block diagram illustrating a plurality of modules of a pre-processing subunit in one aspect;
FIG. 22B is a block diagram illustrating a plurality of modules of a pre-processing subunit in a second aspect;
FIG. 23 is an isometric view of a sensor head of a renal function monitoring system in a second aspect;
FIG. 24 is a bottom view of the sensor head of a renal function monitoring system illustrated in FIG. 23;
FIG. 25 is an isometric view of the sensor head of a renal function monitoring system illustrated in FIG. 23 with the upper housing and various electrical components removed to expose an inner housing; and
FIG. 26 is an exploded view of the inner housing of the sensor head illustrated in FIG. 25.
This written description uses examples to disclose the invention, including the best mode, and also to enable any person skilled in the art to practice the invention, including making and using any devices or systems and performing any incorporated methods. The patentable scope of the invention is defined by the claims, and may include other examples that occur to those skilled in the art. Such other examples are intended to be within the scope of the claims if they have structural elements that do not differ from the literal language of the claims, or if they include equivalent structural elements with insubstantial differences from the literal languages of the claims.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION
Unless defined otherwise, all technical and scientific terms used herein have the same meaning as commonly understood by one of ordinary skill in the art to which the disclosure belongs. Although any methods and materials similar to or equivalent to those described herein may be used in the practice or testing of the present disclosure, the preferred materials and methods are described below.
A sample, as used herein, refers to a single, discrete data value acquired from a signal and/or telemetry analog-to-digital converter (ADC) for a single acquisition/telemetry channel.
A measured value, as used herein, refers to a single, discrete data value created by demodulating or accumulating a sequence of samples from one acquisition channel.
A measurement, as used herein, refers to a set comprising the Demodulated In-Phase, Demodulated Out-of-Phase, and Averaged measurement values from one acquisition channel.
A measurement subset, as used herein, refers to a set comprising all measurements for all acquisition channels during a single source LED illumination. For example, all measurements of an acquisition channel may include demodulated in-phase, demodulated out-of-phase, and averaged measurements.
A measurement set, as used herein, refers to a set comprising one measurement subset for each source LED.
An acquisition, as used herein, refers to the overall process by which a measurement set is obtained.
A measurement sequence, as used herein, refers to a sequence of one or more measurement sets.
A telemetry value, as used herein, refers to a single, discrete data value acquired from a single channel of a telemetry ADC.
A telemetry set, as used herein, refers to a set comprising one telemetry value from each telemetry channel.
FIG. 1 is a schematic illustration of a system 100, provided as a non-limiting example, in which fluorescence 102 with an emission wavelength (λem) is detected from a region of interest of a patient 104 using a light detector 110 configured to detect only those photons with an emission wavelength (λem). In general, the exogenous fluorescent agent 112 produces fluorescence 102 in response to an excitation event including, but not limited to: illumination by light 106 at an excitation wavelength (λex), occurrence of an enzymatic reaction, changes in local electrical potential, and any other known excitation event associated with exogenous fluorescent agents. In an aspect, the system 100 may include a light source 108 configured to deliver light 106 at an excitation wavelength (λex) to the patient 104. In this aspect, the fluorescence 102 is produced in response to illumination by the light 106. In addition, the excitation wavelength (λex) of the light 106 and the emission wavelength (λem) of the fluorescence 102 are spectrally distinct (i.e., λex is sufficiently different from λem) so that the light detector 110 may be configured to selectively detect only the fluorescence 102 by the inclusion of any known optical wavelength separation device including, but not limited to, an optical filter.
In some aspects, changes in the fluorescence 102 may be monitored to obtain information regarding a physiological function or status of the patient. By way of non-limiting example, the time-dependent decrease in the fluorescence 102 measured after introduction of the exogenous fluorescent agent 112 into a circulatory vessel of the patient 104 may be analyzed to obtain information regarding renal function of the patient 104. In this non-limiting example, the rate of decrease in fluorescence 102 may be assumed to be proportional to the rate of removal of the exogenous fluorescent agent 112 by the kidneys of the patient 104, thereby providing a measurement of renal function including, but not limited to: renal decay time constant (RDTC) and glomerular filtration rate (GFR).
Without being limited to any particular theory, the intensity of fluorescence 102 detected by the light detector 110 may be influenced by any one or more of numerous factors including, but not limited to: the intensity or power of the light 106 at λex delivered to the patient 104, the scattering and absorption of the light 106 passing through intervening tissues 114 of the patient 104 between the light source 108 and the exogenous fluorescent agents 112, the concentration of exogenous fluorescent agents 112 illuminated by the light 106, and the scattering and absorption of the fluorescence 102 at λem passing through intervening tissues 114 of the patient 104 between the exogenous fluorescent agents 112 and the light detector 110.
Existing methods typically assume that the optical properties within the intervening tissue 114 remain essentially unchanged throughout the period during which measurements are obtained by the system 100. As a result, existing methods typically obtain initial measurements through the intervening tissue 114 of the patient 104 prior to introduction of the exogenous fluorescent agent 112, and these initial measurements are subtracted to correct all subsequent data obtained after introduction of the exogenous fluorescent agent 112. However, during long-term monitoring of the patient 104, changes in the optical properties of the intervening tissue 114 may occur due to changes in at least one characteristic including, but not limited to: optical coupling efficiency of the light detector 110 to the patient 104; concentration of chromophores such as hemoglobin due to changes in blood volume caused by vascular dilation, constriction, or compression; changes in the optical properties of chromophores such as hemoglobin due to changes in oxygenation status; and changes in tissue structure such as changes related to edema.
These dynamic changes in the optical properties of the intervening tissue 114 may introduce uncertainty into long-term measurements of fluorescence 102. By way of non-limiting example, changes in the optical properties of the intervening tissue 114 may modulate the intensity or power of the light 106 illuminating the exogenous fluorescent agents 112, causing a modulation of the fluorescence 102 produced by the exogenous fluorescent agents 112 that may be erroneously interpreted as a modulation in the concentration of the exogenous fluorescent agents 112. By way of another non-limiting example, changes in the optical properties of the intervening tissue 114 may modulate the intensity or power of the fluorescence 102 reaching the light detector 110 that may also be erroneously interpreted as a modulation in the concentration of the exogenous fluorescent agents 112. The potential modulation of changes in the optical properties of the intervening tissue 114 may introduce uncertainty into measurements of fluorescence 102, in particular those measurements associated with long-term monitoring of fluorescence 102 as described herein above.
In various aspects, a method of correcting in vivo real-time measurements of fluorescence from an exogenous fluorescent agent to remove the effects of changes in the optical properties within the tissue of the patient is provided. The inclusion of an additional measurement of light passing through the tissue of the patient via a separate optical pathway (i.e. diffuse reflectance) from the optical pathway of the fluorescence measurements enhanced the quantification of changes in the optical properties of the tissue during prolonged monitoring of fluorescence from an exogenous fluorescent agent within a patient. The inclusion of this additional measurement in the correction method in various aspects was discovered to significantly enhance the fidelity of fluorescence measurements, even in the presence of substantial perturbations as described herein below.
Detailed descriptions of devices for monitoring the fluorescence of an exogenous fluorescent agent in vivo and methods of correcting the fluorescence measurements to remove the effects of the diffuse reflectance of light within the tissue of the patient are provided herein below.
Although the devices and methods are described herein below in the context of a non-invasive optical renal function monitor, it is to be understood that the correction method described herein, with appropriate modification, may be applied to any compatible device configured to perform measurements by delivering EM radiation from an external source through any scattering medium and/or receiving EM radiation propagated through any scattering medium to an external detector. Non-limiting examples of EM radiation include visible light, near-IR light, IR light, UV radiation, and microwave radiation. The scattering media may include any living or non-living material capable of propagating EM radiation of at least one EM frequency without limitation. At least a portion of the scattering media may further include one or more substructures or compounds capable of reflecting and/or absorbing the EM radiation. Non-limiting examples of scattering media include: a tissue of a living or dead organism, such as a skin of a mammal; a gas such as air with or without additional particles such as dust, fluid droplets, or a solid particulate material; a fluid such as water with or without additional particles such as gas bubbles or a solid particulate material. Further, the devices and methods described herein below are not limited to detection of renal function, but may be modified for use in the detection of the function of other physiological systems including, but not limited to, liver systems, or gastro-intestinal systems.
System Description
In various aspects, the methods of correcting fluorescence measurements to remove the effects of variations in local skin properties may be incorporated into any fluorescence monitoring system including, but not limited to, a system for optically monitoring renal function in vivo and in real time by measuring changes in fluorescence of an exogenous fluorescent agent injected into a patient as the agent is renally eliminated from the patient. FIG. 2 is a block diagram of a system 200 for optically monitoring renal function of a patient 202 via measurements of the fluorescence of an injected exogenous fluorescent agent in the patient 202, in one aspect. The system 200 may include at least one sensor head 204 configured to deliver light at an excitatory wavelength (λex) into a first region 206 of the patient 202. The system 200 is further configured to detect light at an emission wavelength (λem), at a second region 208 of the patient 202, and to detect light at the excitatory wavelength (λex), and/or emission wavelength (λem), at a third region 210 of the patient 202.
The system 200 may further include a controller 212 operatively coupled to the at least one sensor head 204, an operation unit 214, and a display unit 216. In various aspects, the controller 212 is configured to control the operation of the at least one sensor head 204 as described in additional detail herein below. The controller 212 is further configured to receive measurements of light from the at least one sensor head 204. The controller 212 is further configured to correct the light measurements corresponding to fluorescence from exogenous fluorescent agents according to at least one method including, but not limited to, the disclosed methods of correcting fluorescence measurements using measurements of the diffuse reflectance of light. The controller 212 is further configured to transform the fluorescence measurements received from the at least one sensor head 204 into a summary parameter representative of the renal function of the patient 202. In addition, the controller 212 is configured to receive at least one signal representing user inputs from the operation unit 214 and to generate one or more forms for display on the display unit 216 including, but not limited to, a graphical user interface (GUI).
A detailed description of the sensor head 204 and controller 212 are provided herein below.
A. Sensor Head
In various aspects, the sensor head 204 includes at least one light source and at least one light detector in a housing. FIG. 6 is a side view of a housing 600 for the sensor head 204 in one aspect that includes an upper housing 602 and a lower housing 604 attached together to enclose two light sources and two light detectors. The bottom surface 608 of the lower housing 604 further includes a contact surface 606 configured to be attached to the skin of a patient 202 using a biocompatible adhesive material including, but not limited to, a surgical adhesive. In use, the surface of the adhesive material opposite to the contact surface 606 may be affixed to the skin of the patient 202. In various aspects, the adhesive material may be configured to transmit light through the light sources into the patient and to further transmit the fluorescence from the patient to the light detectors. In one aspect, the adhesive material may be an optically transparent material. In another aspect, the adhesive material may be produced from a non-fluorescing material to prevent the production of confounding fluorescence by the adhesive material.
In various other aspects, the upper housing 602 may further include one or more openings 806 configured to provide access to the interior for a cable including, but not limited to, a USB cable, and/or to provide a window for a display generated by the circuitry contained within the housing 600, such as an indicator LED.
FIG. 7 is a bottom view of the housing 600 illustrated in FIG. 8. The contact surface 606 may include an aperture plate 702 including one or more apertures 704 configured to transmit light between the skin of the patient and the light sources and light detectors contained inside the housing 600. In one aspect, the aperture plate 702 may be epoxied into the lower housing 604 to prevent liquid ingress into the interior of the housing 600. In various aspects, the dimensions, arrangement, and/or spacing of the one or more apertures 704 may be selected to enhance various aspects of the operation of the system 200, as described in additional detail herein below. In another aspect, the contact surface 606 may further include a temperature sensor opening 706 configured to provide a thermal path from the skin surface of the patient to an additional temperature sensor 228 configured to monitor the temperature at the skin surface of the patient.
FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram illustrating the arrangement of the electrical components within the housing 600. Referring to FIG. 8, the upper housing 602 and the lower housing 604 may be affixed together with screws 802, and the screw holes and the interface between the two housing pieces may be filled with a water-resistant filler material 804 including, but not limited to, a silicone material such as room temperature vulcanization silicone (RTV) to inhibit liquid ingress into the interior of the housing 600.
In an aspect, the housing 600 may further include a cable opening 806 formed through the upper housing 602. The cable opening 806 may be configured to provide access to the interior for an electrical cable including, but not limited to, a USB cable. In one aspect, the cable may enable the supply of power to the light sources, light detectors, indicator lights, and associated electrical devices and circuits as described herein below. In another aspect, the cable may further enable the communication of control signals into the housing to enable the operation of the electrical components within the housing 600, and the cable may further enable the communication of data signals encoding measurements obtained by one of more of the sensor devices contained within the housing 600 including, but not limited to: the first light detector 222, the second light detector 224, any additional light detectors, such as a first monitor photodiode 904 and a second monitor diode 906, and any additional temperature sensors 228 (see FIG. 9). In an aspect, the cable may be attached to the cable opening 806 and adjacent upper housing 602 with a light absorbent adhesive including, but not limited to, black epoxy and may further be sealed against water incursion using a water resistant filler material including, but not limited to, RTV.
In an additional aspect, the housing 600 may further include at least one display opening 808 formed through the upper housing 602. In one aspect, each display opening 808 may be configured to provide a window for a display generated by the circuitry contained within the housing 600, such as an indicator LED 810. In an aspect, each indicator LED 810 may be positioned on a circuit board 812. In an aspect, a light pipe 814 may be epoxied into the display opening 808 within the upper housing 602 above each indicator LED 810. Each a light pipe 814 may be filled with a water-resistant filler material such as RTV for liquid ingress protection. In various aspects, the at least one indicator LED 810 may illuminate in a predetermined pattern to enable a user of the system 200 to monitor the operational status of the sensor head 204.
FIG. 9 is a close-up view of the interior optical region of the sensor head 204 showing the arrangement of the light sources 218/220 and the light detectors 222/224 within the housing 600 in one aspect. In an aspect, the light sources 218/220 are separated from the light detectors 222/224, and the first light detector 222 is separated from the second light detector 224 are separated from one another by a sensor mount 912 affixed to the aperture plate 702. In an aspect, the sensor mount 912 ensures that light from the light sources 218/220 does not reach the light detectors 222/224 without coupling through the skin of the patient 202. The separation between the first light detector 222 within the first detection well 908 and the second light detector 224 within the second detection well 910 ensures that the fluorescence signal produced by the exogenous fluorescent agent within the tissues of the patient 202 is distinguishable from the unfiltered excitation light introduced by the first light source 218.
Referring again to FIG. 9, the sensor mount 912 may be aligned to a circuit board (not shown) containing the light sources 218/220 and light detectors 222/224 using alignment pins 914 and held in place using screws 916. In an aspect, the sensor mount 912 may be affixed to the circuit board containing the light sources 218/220 and light detectors 222/224 using a light absorbent adhesive including, but not limited to, black epoxy. In this aspect, this light-resistant join between the circuit board and the sensor mount 912 inhibits leakage of light between the light sources 218/220 and the light detectors 222/224, and further inhibits the leakage of light between the first light detector 222 and the second light detector 224. The apertures 704 configured to transmit light to and from the skin underlying the contact surface 606 of the sensor head 204 are formed through a structurally separate aperture plate 702 (see FIG. 7) to provide for precise alignment of the apertures 704 to the corresponding light sources 218/220 and light detectors 222/224, described in additional detail herein below.
In various aspects, the sensor mount 912 may further provide electrical shielding for any sensitive electrical devices within the sensor head 204 including, but not limited to, the light detectors 222/224. In one aspect, the sensor mount 912 may be constructed of an electrically conductive material including, but not limited to: aluminum and aluminum alloy. In this aspect, the sensor mount 912 may be electrically coupled to the ground of the circuit board using conductive screws 916. In addition, any glass windows positioned within the source well 902 and/or detector wells 908/910 adjacent to the aperture plate 702 including, but not limited to, an optical filter 244 and clear glass 246 as described herein below (see FIG. 2) may further include an electrically conductive coating. Non-limiting examples of suitable electrically conductive coatings for the glass windows of the sensor mount include a conductive indium tin oxide (ITO) coating and any other suitable transparent and electrically conductive coating.
Without being limited to any particular theory, the conductive material of the sensor mount 912 provides a partial Faraday cage to shield the electrically sensitive detectors 222/224 from electrical noise generated by or conducted through the patient's body. The partial Faraday cage provided by the sensor mount 912 may be completed with the conductive ITO coating on the glass windows within the source well 902 and/or detector wells 908/910. In an aspect, the electrically conductive coating on the glass windows, such as an ITO coating, are sufficiently conductive to provide electrical shielding while remaining sufficiently transparent for the transmission of light to and from the skin surface of the patient 202. In another aspect, the ITO coating of each glass window may be grounded to an electrically conductive sensor mount 912 using any known electrical grounding method including, by not limited to: a wire connecting the glass coating to the sensor mount 912 that is attached at both wire ends with conductive epoxy, or attaching the coated glass directly to a glass fitting such as a ledge or frame formed within each of the source well 902 and/or detector wells 908/910 using an electrically conductive epoxy.
In various aspects, the contact surface 606 of the housing 600 may be attached the patient's skin using a biocompatible and an adhesive material 610 including, but not limited to, a clear double-sided medical grade adhesive, as illustrated in FIG. 6 and FIG. 7. Any adhesive material selected to be optically transmissive at the excitation and emission wavelengths used by the system 100 as described herein. The adhesive material 610 may be positioned on the contact surface 606 such that the adhesive material covers the apertures 704, but exposes the temperature sensor opening 706 to ensure sufficient thermal contact with the skin of the patient 202. In one aspect, the sensor head 204 may be further secured to the patient 202 as needed using one or more additional biocompatible medical fastener devices including, but not limited to: Tegaderm bandages, medical tape, or any other suitable biocompatible medical fastener devices.
In an aspect, the contact surface 606 may be located near the front edge of the sensor head 204 to provide for accurate positioning of the contact surface 606 on a selected region of the patient's skin. In another aspect, the apertures 704 may be positioned towards the center of the contact surface 606 to reduce ambient light ingress. Without being limited to any particular theory, ambient light may enter one or more of the apertures 704 due to incomplete adhesion of the contact surface 606 to the patient's skin and/or due to the propagation of ambient light passing through the patient's exposed skin situated just outside of the footprint of the contact surface 606 into the apertures 704.
Referring again to FIG. 6, the bottom surface 608 of the sensor head 204 curves away from the plane of the contact surface 606 to enable attachment of the sensor head 204 to varied body type and locations. For attachment of the sensor head 204 to relatively flat or concave surfaces, any gap 612 between the bottom surface 608 and the skin surface of the patient 202 may be filled with a biocompatible foam to ensure consistent contact with the patient 202.
i) Light Sources
In various aspects, each sensor head 204 includes a first light source 218 and a second light source 220 configured to deliver light to a first region 206 of a patient 202. The first light source 218 is configured to deliver the light at the excitatory wavelength and the second light source 220 is configured to deliver light at the emission wavelength. In one aspect, the excitatory wavelength may be selected to fall within a spectral range at which the exogenous fluorescent agent exhibits relatively high absorbance. In another aspect, the emission wavelength may be selected to fall within a spectral range at which the exogenous fluorescent agent exhibits relatively high emission. The exogenous fluorescent agent may be selected for enhanced contrast relative to other chromophores within the tissues of the patient 202 including, but not limited to hemoglobin within red blood cells and/or melanin within melanocytes. In various aspects, the exogenous fluorescent agent may be selected to conduct measurements within spectral ranges with lower variation in absorption by other chromophores such as hemoglobin within the tissues of the patient 202 during use.
Without being limited to any particular theory, hemoglobin (Hb) is an absorber of visible light in the tissues of the patient 202, and has the potential to interfere with the measurements of fluorescence of the exogenous fluorescent agent if the Hb absorbance varies over the measurement period of the system 200. Because hemoglobin (Hb) enables gas exchange within virtually all tissues containing circulatory vessels, virtually all tissues are vulnerable to interference with fluorescence measurements of the system 200 due to fluctuations in hemoglobin concentration. Within most tissues, externally applied pressure may cause blood pooling which may be manifested as an apparent decay of the fluorescence measured at the skin surface. Periodic opening and closing of blood vessels (“vasomotion”) near the surface of the skin may also cause fluctuations in hemoglobin concentration which may introduce additional noise in to measurements of fluorescence of the exogenous fluorescent agent by the system 200. Further, in some patients 202, such as those with pulmonary disorders, variation in the Hb oxygenation state may also be observed, leading to additional potential variations in the background skin absorbance due to differences in the absorption spectra of deoxyhemoglobin (Hb) and oxyhemoglobin (HbO2), shown illustrated in FIG. 3.
In an aspect, the excitation and emission wavelengths for the exogenous fluorescent agent may be selected to coincide with a pair of HbO2/Hb isosbestic points, each isosbestic point defined herein as a wavelength characterized by about equal light absorbance by HbO2 and Hb. Without being limited to any particular theory, fluorescence measurements conducted at each isosbestic wavelength are less sensitive to variation due to changes in the oxygenation of hemoglobin, so long as the combined concentration of HbO2 and Hb remains relatively stable during measurements of fluorescence by the system 200. Non-limiting examples of Hb/HbO2 isosbestic wavelengths include: about 390 nm, about 422 nm, about 452 nm, about 500 nm, about 530 nm, about 538 nm, about 545 nm, about 570 nm, about 584 nm, about 617 nm, about 621 nm, about 653 nm, and about 805 nm.
In various aspects, the excitation and emission wavelengths may be selected based on the absorption and emission wavelengths of the selected exogenous fluorescent agent of the system 200. In one aspect, the excitatory wavelength may be an HbO2/Hb isosbestic wavelength and simultaneously may be a wavelength within a spectral range of high absorbance of the exogenous fluorescent agent. In another aspect, the emission wavelength may be an HbO2/Hb isosbestic wavelength and simultaneously may be a wavelength within a spectral range of emission by the exogenous fluorescent agent. Table 3 provides a summary of HbO2/Hb isosbestic wavelengths within the spectral range of 200 nm to about 1000 nm. FIG. 4 is a graph of the absorption spectra used to identify the HbO2/Hb isosbestic wavelengths of Table 1.
TABLE 1
HbO2/Hb Isosbestic Wavelengths λ = 200-1000 nm
Excitation Hb Molar
Wavelength Extinct. Coeff. HbO2 dA/dλ Hb dA/dλ
(nm) (M−1 cm−1) (M−1 cm−1 nm−1) (M−1 cm−1 nm−1)
260 1.2 × 105  1.8 × 103  6.3 × 102
288 1.1 × 105 −2.9 × 103 −3.4 × 103
298 7.0 × 104 −3.3 × 103 −3.2 × 103
314 6.5 × 104  1.6 × 103  1.5 × 103
324 8.2 × 104  1.9 × 103  1.8 × 103
340 1.1 × 105  6.5 × 102  1.6 × 103
390 1.7 × 105  1.0 × 104  5.1 × 103
422 4.3 × 105 −2.6 × 104  1.3 × 104
452 6.3 × 104 −2.3 × 103 −1.7 × 104
500 2.1 × 104 −1.7 × 102  4.8 × 102
530 3.9 × 104  2.0 × 103  7.2 × 102
545 5.1 × 104 −1.3 × 103  7.0 × 102
570 4.5 × 104  2.2 × 103 −9.0 × 102
584 3.4 × 104 −4.1 × 103 −7.1 × 102
738 1.1 × 103  6.8 × 100  3.5 × 100
796 8.0 × 102  8.8 × 100  1.1 × 101
By way of illustrative example, FIG. 3 is a graph summarizing the absorption spectra for HbO2 and Hb, as well as the absorption and emission spectra of frequency spectra of MB-102, an exogenous fluorescent agent in one aspect. Emission spectra for a blue LED light source and a green LED light source are also shown superimposed over the other spectra of FIG. 3. In this aspect, the system 200 may include a blue LED as the first light source 218, and the excitatory wavelength for the system 200 may be the isosbestic wavelength of about 450 nm. As listed in Table 1 and shown in FIG. 3, the Hb absorbance spectra is strongly sloped at the isosbestic wavelengths of about 420 nm to about 450 nm (see columns 3 and 4 of Table 1), indicating that the relative absorbance of HbO2 and Hb at the isosbestic wavelength of about 450 nm is sensitive to small changes in excitatory wavelength. However, at wavelengths above about 500 nm, the HbO2/Hb spectra are less steeply sloped, and a broader band light source including, but not limited to, an LED with a bandpass filter may suffice for use as a first light source 218.
In another aspect, the excitatory wave length may be selected to enhance the contrast in light absorbance between the exogenous fluorescent agent and the chromophores within the tissues of the patient 202. By way of non-limiting example, as shown in FIG. 3 at the isosbestic wavelength of 452 nm, the light absorption of the MB-102 is more than three-fold higher than the light absorption of the HbO2 and the Hb. Without being limited to any particular theory, a higher proportion of light illuminating the tissue of the patient 202 at a wavelength of about 450 nm will be absorbed by the MB-102 relative to the HbO2 and Hb, thus enhancing the efficiency of absorption by the MB-102 and reducing the intensity of light at the excitatory wavelength needed to elicit a detectable fluorescence signal.
In various aspects, a second isosbestic wavelength may also be selected as the emission wavelength for the system 200. By way of non-limiting example, FIG. 3 shows an emission spectrum of the MB-102 exogenous contrast agent that is characterized by an emission peak at a wavelength of about 550 nm. In this non-limiting example, the isosbestic wavelength of 570 nm may be selected as the emission wavelength to be detected by first and second detectors 222/224. In various other aspects, the emission wavelength of the system 200 may be selected to fall within a spectral range characterized by relatively low absorbance of the chromophores within the tissues of the patient 202. Without being limited to any particular theory, the low absorbance of the chromophores at the selected emission wavelength may reduce the losses of light emitted by the exogenous fluorescent agent and enhancing the efficiency of fluorescence detection.
In various aspects, the first light source 218 and the second light source 220 may be any light source configured to deliver light at the excitatory wavelength and at the emission wavelength. Typically, the first light source 218 delivers light at an intensity that is sufficient to penetrate the tissues of the patient 202 to the exogenous fluorescent agent with sufficient intensity remaining to induce the emission of light at the emission wave length by the exogenous fluorescent agent. Typically, the first light source 218 delivers light at an intensity that is sufficient to penetrate the tissues of the patient 202 to the exogenous fluorescent agent with sufficient intensity remaining after scattering and/or absorption to induce fluorescence at the emission wave length by the exogenous fluorescent agent. However, the intensity of light delivered by the first light source 218 is limited to an upper value to prevent adverse effects such as tissue burning, cell damage, and/or photo-bleaching of the exogenous fluorescent agent and/or the endogenous chromophores in the skin (“auto-fluorescence”).
Similarly, the second light source 220 delivers light at the emission wavelength of the exogenous fluorescent agent at an intensity configured to provide sufficient energy to propagate with scattering and absorption through the first region 206 of the patient and out the second region 208 and third region 210 with sufficient remaining intensity for detection by the first light detector 222 and the second light detector 224, respectively. As with the first light source 218, the intensity of light produced by the second light source 220 is limited to an upper value to prevent the adverse effects such as tissue injury or photobleaching described previously.
In various aspects, the first light source 218 and the second light source 220 may be any light source suitable for use with fluorescent medical imaging systems and devices. Non-limiting examples of suitable light sources include: LEDs, diode lasers, pulsed lasers, continuous waver lasers, xenon arc lamps or mercury-vapor lamps with an excitation filter, lasers, and supercontinuum sources. In one aspect, the first light source 218 and/or the second light source 220 may produce light at a narrow spectral bandwidth suitable for monitoring the concentration of the exogenous fluorescence agent using the method described herein. In another aspect, the first light source 218 and the second light source 220 may produce light at a relatively wide spectral bandwidth.
In one aspect, the selection of intensity of the light produced by the first light source 218 and the second light source 220 by the system 200 may be influenced any one or more of at least several factors including, but not limited to, the maximum permissible exposure (MPE) for skin exposure to a laser beam according to applicable regulatory standards such as ANSI standard Z136.1. In another aspect, light intensity for the system 200 may be selected to reduce the likelihood of photobleaching of the exogenous fluorescent source and/or other chromophores within the tissues of the patient 202 including, but not limited to: collagen, keratin, elastin, hemoglobin within red blood cells and/or melanin within melanocytes. In yet another aspect, the light intensity for the system 200 may be selected in order to elicit a detectable fluorescence signal from the exogenous fluorescent source within the tissues of the patient 202 and the first light detector 222 and/or second light detector. In yet another aspect, the light intensity for the system 200 may be selected to provide suitably high light energy while reducing power consumption, inhibiting heating/overheating of the first light source 218 and the second light source 220, and/or reducing the exposure time of the patient's skin to light from the first light detector 222 and/or second light detector.
In various aspects, the intensity of the first light source 218 and the second light source 220 may be modulated to compensate any one or more of at least several factors including, but not limited to: individual differences in the concentration of chromophores within the patient 202, such as variation in skin pigmentation. In various other aspects, the detection gain of the light detectors may be modulated to similarly compensate for variation in individual differences in skin properties. In an aspect, the variation in skin pigmentation may be between two different individual patients 202, or between two different positions on the same patient 202. In an aspect, the light modulation may compensate for variation in the optical pathway taken by the light through the tissues of the patient 202. The optical pathway may vary due to any one or more of at least several factors including but not limited to: variation in separation distances between the light sources and light detectors of the system 200; variation in the secure attachment of the sensor head 204 to the skin of the patient 202; variation in the light output of the light sources due to the exposure of the light sources to environmental factors such as heat and moisture; variation in the sensitivity of the light detectors due to the exposure of the light detectors to environmental factors such as heat and moisture; modulation of the duration of illumination by the light sources, and any other relevant operational parameter.
In various aspects, the first light source 218 and the second light source 220 may be configured to modulate the intensity of the light produced as needed according to any one or more of the factors described herein above. In one aspect, if the first light source 218 and the second light source 220 are devices configured to continuously vary output fluence as needed, for example LED light sources, the intensity of the light may be modulated electronically using methods including, but not limited to, modulation of the electrical potential, current, and/or power supplied to the first light source 218 and/or the second light source 220. In another aspect, the intensity of the light may be modulated using optical methods including, but not limited to: partially or fully occluding the light leaving the first light source 218 and the second light source 220 using an optical device including, but not limited to: an iris, a shutter, and/or one or more filters; diverting the path of the light leaving the first light source 218 and the second light source 220 away from the first region 206 of the patient using an optical device including, but not limited to a lenses, a mirror, and/or a prism.
In various aspects, the intensity of the light produced by the first light source 218 and the second light source 220 may be modulated via control of the laser fluence, defined herein as the rate of energy within the produced light beam. In one aspect, the laser fluence may be limited to ranges defined by safety standards including, but not limited to, ANSI standards for exposure to laser energy such as ANSI Z136.1. Without being limited to any particular theory, the maximum fluence of light delivered to a patient 202 may be influenced by a variety of factors including, but not limited to the wavelength of the delivered light and the duration of exposure to the light. In various aspects, the maximum fluence of light may range from about 0.003 J/cm2 for light at delivered at wavelengths of less than about 302 nm to about 1 J/cm2 for light delivered at wavelengths ranging from about 1500 nm to about 1800 nm for a duration of up to about 10 sec. For light delivered at wavelengths ranging from about 400 nm to about 1400 nm (visible/NIR light) the maximum fluence may be about 0.6 J/cm2 for a duration of up to about 10 sec, and up to about 0.2 J/cm2 for a duration ranging from about 10 sec to about 30,000 sec. For extended exposures, the delivered light is limited to a maximum power density (W/cm2) according to ANSI standards: visible/NIR light is limited to 0.2 W/cm2 and far IR light is limited to about 0.1 W/cm2. Without being limited to a particular theory, extended exposure to light delivered at UV wavelengths is not typically recommended according to ANSI standards.
In another aspect, the fluence of light at the excitatory wavelength produced by the first light source 218 may be modulated in order to provide sufficient energy to propagate through the skin in the first region 206 of the patient 202 to the exogenous fluorescent agent without photobleaching, and to illuminate the exogenous fluorescent agent with energy sufficient to induce detectable fluorescence at the first light detector 222 and/or the second light detector 224. In an additional aspect, the fluence of light at the emission wavelength produced by the second light source 220 may be modulated in order to provide sufficient energy to propagate through the skin in the first region 206 of the patient 202 and through the skin in the second region 208 and the third region 210 without photobleaching to emerge as detectable light at the first light detector 222 and the second light detector 224, respectively. By way of non-limiting example, the fluence of light produced by a light source at 450 nm or 500 nm may be limited to 1.5 and 5 mW/cm2, respectively, to prevent photo-bleaching.
In various aspects, the fluence of the light produced by the first light source 218 and the second light source 220 may be modulated by any suitable systems and/or devices without limitation as described herein above. This modulation may be enabled a single time during operation of the system 200, and as a result, the fluence of the light produced by each of the first light source 218 and the second light source 220 may be relatively constant throughout the operation of the system 200. In another aspect, the light modulation may be enabled at discrete times over the duration of operation of the system 200, or the light modulation may be enabled continuously over the duration of operation of the system 200.
In one aspect, the fluence of the light may be modulated via manual adjustment of any of the power source settings and/or optical device settings as described above when the system 200 is configured in an Engineering Mode. In another aspect, the fluence of the light may be modulated automatically via one or more control schemes encoded in the light source control unit of the controller 212 as described herein below. In this aspect, the degree of modulation may be specified at least in part on the basis of feedback measurements obtained by various sensors provide in the sensor head 204 of the system 200 including, but not limited to, additional light detectors 226 and temperature sensors 228 as described in additional detail herein below.
In various aspects, light produced by the first light source 218 and the second light source 220 are further characterized by a pulse width, defined herein as the duration of the produced light. Although pulse width is typically used to characterize the performance of a light source that produces light in discrete pulses, such as a pulsed laser, it is to be understood that the term “light pulse”, as used herein, refers to any discrete burst of light produced by a single light source at a single wavelength to enable the acquisition of a single measurement of fluorescence by the system 200. Similarly, the term “pulse width”, as used herein, refers to the duration of a single light pulse produced by a single light source. The pulse width is typically selected based on one or more of at least several factors including, but not limited to: delivery of sufficient light energy to elicit detectable fluorescence from the exogenous fluorescent agent without photobleaching the exogenous fluorescent agent or other chromophores within the tissues of the patient 202; compliance with safety standards for light delivery to patients such as ANSI standards; light delivery at sufficiently high rate to enable data acquisition at a rate compatible with real-time monitoring of renal function; performance capabilities of the selected light sources, light detectors, and other devices of the system 200; preservation of the working life of light sources, light detectors, and other devices related to producing and detecting light energy; and any other relevant factors.
In various aspects, the pulse width of the light produced by the first light source 218 and the second light source 220 may be independently selected to be a duration ranging from about 0.0001 seconds to about 0.5 seconds. In various other aspects, the pulse width of the light produced by the first light source 218 and the second light source 220 may be independently selected to be a duration ranging from about 0.0001 seconds to about 0.001 seconds, from about 0.0005 seconds to about 0.005 seconds, from about 0.001 seconds to about 0.010 seconds, from about 0.005 seconds to about 0.05 seconds, from about 0.01 seconds to about 0.1 seconds, from about 0.05 seconds to about 0.15 seconds, from about 0.1 seconds to about 0.2 seconds, from about 0.15 seconds to about 0.25 seconds, from about 0.2 seconds to about 0.3 seconds, from about 0.25 seconds to about 0.35 seconds, from about 0.3 seconds to about 0.4 seconds, from about 0.35 seconds to about 0.45 seconds, and from about 0.4 seconds to about 0.5 seconds. In one aspect, the pulse widths of the light produced by the first light source 218 and the second light source 220 are both about 0.1 seconds, as illustrated schematically in FIG. 5.
In another aspect, the light produced by the first light source 218 and the second light source 220 may be further characterized by a pulse rate, defined herein as the number of pulses produced by a light source per second. Although pulse rate is typically used to characterize the performance of a light source that produces light in discrete pulses, such as a pulsed laser, it is to be understood that the term “pulse rate”, as used herein, refers to the rate of production of a discrete light pulse by a single light source at a single wavelength in association with the acquisition of measurements of fluorescence by the system 200. In various aspects, the pulse rate may be selected based on one or more of at least several factors including, but not limited to: compliance with safety standards for light delivery to patients such as ANSI standards; the performance capabilities of the selected light sources, light detectors, and other devices of the system 200; light delivery rates compatible with data acquisition rates sufficiently rapid for real-time monitoring of renal function; preserving the working life of light sources, light detectors, and other devices related to producing and detecting light energy; and any other relevant factor.
In various aspects, the light sources are configured to deliver light into the tissues of the patient 202 at a single position such as a first region 206, illustrated schematically in FIG. 2. In one aspect, the delivery of light at both the excitatory wavelength and the emission wavelength to the same first region 206 enables both light pulses to share at least a portion of the optical path traveled through the tissues of the patient 202 between the point of entry at the first region 206 and the point of detection at the second region 208 and the third region 210. As discussed in detail herein below, this arrangement of optical paths enhances the quality of data produced by the system 200.
In one aspect, the first light source 218 and the second light source 220 may be operatively coupled to a common means of light delivery. In one aspect (not illustrated) the first light source 218 and the second light source 220 may each be operatively coupled to a first optic fiber and a second optic fiber, respectively, and the first and second optic fibers may be joined to a third optic fiber configured to direct light from the first optic fiber and/or the second optic fiber into the first region 206 of the patient 202. In another aspect, the first light source 218 and the second light source 220 may be operatively coupled to a common optic fiber or other optical assembly configured to direct the light from the first light source 218 and/or the second light source 220 into the first region 206 of the patient 202. In this aspect, the light produced by the first light source 218 and the second light source 220 may be directed in an alternating pattern into the common optic fiber or other optical assembly using an adjustable optical device including, but not limited to, dichroic mirror or a rotating mirror.
In an aspect, the system 200 may include the sensor head 204 provided with a sensor mount 912 configured with one or more wells within which the light sources 218/220 and light detectors 222/224 may be attached in a predetermined arrangement. In one aspect, illustrated in FIG. 9 and FIG. 10, the first light source 218 and the second light source 220 may be situated within a source well 902 of the sensor mount 912 positioned within the sensor head 204 (see FIG. 9). In an aspect, the source well 902 may contain a first LED light source 218 producing light at the excitation wavelength and a second LED light source 220 producing light at the emission wavelength operatively coupled to a single light delivery aperture 1002 (see FIG. 10) formed through the aperture plate 702, which ensures that both wavelengths of light (i.e. excitatory and emission) enter the skin of the patient 202 at approximately the same location including, but not limited to, a first region 206 as illustrated schematically in FIG. 2. In an aspect, the source well 902 further contains a first monitor photodiode 904 and a second monitor photodiode 906, which are used to correct for variations in output power from the LED light sources as described in further detail herein below.
In an aspect, only a fraction of the light energy produced by the LED light sources is delivered to the skin of the patient 202 via the single light delivery aperture 1002. In one aspect, the skin of the patient 202 receives about 1% of the light energy produced by the LED light sources. In various other aspects, the skin of the patient 202 receives about 2%, about 3%, about 4%, about 5%, about 7.5%, about 10%, about 20%, and about 50% of the light energy produced by the LED light sources. Without being limited to any particular theory, the fraction of light produced by the LED light sources delivered to the skin of the patient 202 may be increased by the incorporation of additional optical elements configured to focus and/or direct the light from each LED light source to the light delivery aperture 1002. In another aspect, a diffuser may be used to mix the output of the light sources so that the light energy is rendered homogeneous at the surface of the skin of the patient.
ii) Light Detectors
Referring again to FIG. 2, the system 200 further includes a first light detector 222 and a second light detector 224 in various aspects. In an aspect, the first light detector 222 is configured to measure unfiltered light emitted from the tissue of the patient 202 at the second region 208, and the second light detector 224 is configured to measure filtered light emitted from the tissue of the patient 202 at the third region 210. In this aspect, the second light detector 224 further comprises an optical filter 244 configured to block light at the excitation wavelength. As a result, the first light detector 222 is configured to measure light received at both the excitation and emission wavelengths and the second light detector 224 is configured to detect light received at the emission wavelength only. Combined with the illumination of the tissues of the patient 202 with light at the excitatory wavelength only and at the emission wavelength only in an alternating series (see FIG. 5) the measurements from the first light detector 222 and a second light detector 224 may be analyzed as described herein below to measure the fluorescence of an exogenous fluorescence agent and to correct the fluorescence measurements by removing the effects of the diffuse reflectance of light according to the correction methods described herein below.
In various aspects, the second region 208 and third region 210 within the tissues of the patient 202, from which light is detected by the first light detector 222 and a second light detector 224, respectively, are each separated by a nominal distance from the first region 206 to which light produced by the first light source 218 and the second light source 220 is delivered. This nominal separation distance may be selected to balance two or more effects that may impact the quality of data detected by the light detectors. Without being limited to any particular theory, as the nominal separation distance increases, the total detected signal from the light detectors may decrease due to light scattering along the longer optical path between light source and light detector. This effect may be mitigated by the choice of emission wavelength, which may result in a less pronounced decrease in the detected fluorescence signal (i.e. light at the emission wavelength) relative to the signals associated with detected light at the excitation wavelengths as the nominal separation distance increases. Longer nominal separation distances result in higher sensitivity to signal changes due to changing tissue optical properties.
In one aspect, the nominal separation distance may range from 0 mm (i.e. colocation of light sources and light detectors) to about 10 mm. In various other aspects, the nominal separation distance may range from about 1 mm to about 8 mm, from about 2 mm to about 6 mm, and from about 3 mm to about 5 mm. In various additional aspects, the nominal separation distance may be 0 mm, about 1 mm, about 2 mm, about 3 mm, about 4 mm, about 5 mm, about 6 mm, about 8 mm, and about 10 mm. In one aspect, the nominal separation distance may be about 4 mm to balance these competing effects of logarithmic drop-off of signal and reduced size of the background signal relative to the signal from the exogenous fluorescent agent.
Referring again to FIG. 9, the first light detector 222 may be positioned within a first detection well 908 of the sensor mount 912 and the second light detector 224 may be positioned within a second detection well 910 of the sensor mount 912 within the sensor head 204. The first light detector 222 and the second light detector 224 may receive light from tissue of the patient 202 through a first detector aperture 1004 and second detector aperture 1006, respectively. In an aspect, the first detector aperture 1004, the second detector aperture 1006, and the light delivery aperture 1002 are mutually separated from one another by the nominal separation distance disclosed herein above including, but not limited to, a nominal separation distance of 4 mm. In an aspect, the first detection well 908, second detection well 910, and light source well 902 of the sensor mount 912 may be optically isolated from one another to ensure that light from the light sources 218/220 does not reach the light detectors 222/224 without coupling through the skin of the patient 202. The separation between the two detection wells 908/910 ensures that the detected fluorescence signal from the exogenous fluorescent agent is distinguishable from the unfiltered excitation light, as described in detail herein below.
In an aspect, the three apertures 704 of the aperture plate 702 (see FIG. 7) are circular with a diameter ranging from about 0.5 mm to about 5 mm. In various other aspects, the diameters of the apertures may range from about 0.5 mm to about 1.5 mm, about 1 mm to about 2 mm, about 1.5 mm to about 2.5 mm, about 2 mm to about 3 mm, about 2.5 mm to about 3.5 mm, about 3 mm to about 4 mm, about 3.5 mm to about 4.5 mm, and about 4 mm to about 5 mm.
In one aspect, the three apertures 704 of the aperture plate 702 are circular apertures with a diameter of about 1 mm diameter. This finite width of the apertures may result in an effective source-detector separation of less than the nominal separation distance because of the logarithmic drop-off of signal with increasing separation distance from the light sources at the skin interface of the sensor head 204.
In various aspects, the light detectors 222/224 of the system 200 may be any suitable light detection device without limitation. Non-limiting examples of suitable light detection devices include: photoemission detectors such as photomultiplier tubes, phototubes, and microchannel plate detectors; photoelectric detectors such as LEDs reverse-biased to act as photodiodes, photoresistors, photodiodes, phototransistors; and any other suitable light detection devices. In an aspect, the light detectors 222/224 are sufficiently sensitive to detect the fluorescence emitted by the exogenous fluorescent agents within the tissues of patients 202 that include melanin ranging from about 1% to about 40% melanin in the epidermis and blood volume ranging from about 0.5% to about 2% of the skin volume. In one aspect, the light detectors 222/224 may be silicon photomultiplier (SPM) devices.
In an aspect, the first light detector 222 may be configured to detect light at both the excitatory frequency and at the emission frequency, and the second light detector 224 may be configured to detect light at the emission frequency only. In one aspect, the second light detector 224 may respond only to light of the emission wavelength as a result of the design and materials of the sensor elements of the second light detector 224. In another aspect, the second light detector 224 may respond to a wider range of light wavelengths, but may be positioned downstream from an optical filter configured to pass only the portion of incoming light with the emission wavelength and further configured to block the passage of light wavelengths outside of the emission wavelength.
Any suitable optical filter may be selected for use with the second light detector 224 to detect light selectively at the emission wavelength. Non-limiting examples of suitable optical filters include absorptive filters and interference/dichroic filters. Without being limited to any particular theory, the performance of an absorption filter does not vary significantly with the angle of incident light, whereas the performance of an interference/dichroic filter is sensitive to the angle of incident light and may require additional collimation optics to effectively filter the Lambertian light distribution representative of light emitted from the skin of the patient 202.
In one aspect, the second light detector 224 may be positioned downstream of an absorptive long-pass filter configured to pass light above a predetermined wavelength to the second light detector 224. By way of non-limiting example, the second light detector 224 may be positioned downstream of an long-pass OG530 filter configured to pass light with wavelengths above about 530 nm. Other non-limiting examples of suitable filters include a Hoya O54 filter and a Hoya CM500 filter.
In various aspects, an absorption filter 244 configured to absorb excitation wavelength light may be positioned within the second detection well 910 between the second light detector 224 and the second detector aperture 1006. In one aspect, the absorption filter 244 may be constructed from OG530 Schott glass. The thickness of the absorption filter 244 may be selected to enable an optical density sufficient to filter the excitation light by about three orders of magnitude. In one aspect, the thickness of the absorption filter 244 may range from about 1 mm to about 10 mm. In various other aspects, the thickness of the absorption filter 244 may range from about 1 mm to about 8 mm, from about 2 mm to about 6 mm, and from about 3 mm to about 5 mm. In various additional aspects, the thickness of the absorption filter 244 may be about 1 mm, about 2 mm, about 3 mm, about 4 mm, about 5 mm, about 6 mm, about 7 mm, about 8 mm, about 9 mm, and about 10 mm. In one aspect, the absorption filter 244 is a 3-mm thick filter constructed of OG530 Schott glass.
In an additional aspect, an optical diffuser may be provided within the light source well 902. In this aspect, the optical diffuser enables mixing of the light entering the light source well 902 from the first and second light sources 218/220. By mixing the light from the first and second light sources 218/220 using the optical diffuser prior to illumination of the first region 206 of the patient 202, the similarity of the optical paths taken by emission-wavelength light and excitation-wavelength light through the tissues of the patient is enhanced relative to the corresponding optical paths taken by unmixed light, thereby reducing a potential source of variation.
In an aspect, a transparent material configured to pass light of both the excitatory and emission wavelengths may be positioned within the first detection well 908 between the first light detector 222 and the first detector aperture 1004. In this aspect, the transparent material may be any material with similar optical properties to the material of the absorption filter 244 including, but not limited to, thickness and index of refraction. In one aspect, the transparent material within the first detection well 908 may be fused silica glass of the same thickness as the absorption filter 244.
By way of non-limiting example, the transmission spectrum of the OG 530 filter is provided in FIG. 3. As illustrated in FIG. 3, the transmission spectrum of the OG 530 filter overlaps with the emission spectrum of the MB-102 exogenous fluorescent agent and the emission spectrum of a green LED used as a second light source 220 (emission wavelength). In addition, the transmission spectrum of the OG 530 filter excludes the emission spectrum of the blue LED used as a first light source 218 and the absorbance spectrum of the MB-102 exogenous fluorescent agent (excitation wavelength).
In an aspect, the transparent material such as glass 246 and the absorption filter 244 may be secured to ledges formed within the first detection well 908 and the second detection well 910, respectively. The transparent material such as glass 246 and the optical filter 244 may be secured in place using an opaque and/or light absorbing adhesive including, but not limited to, black epoxy to ensure that all light received through the first detector aperture 1004 and the second detector aperture 1006 travels through the optical filter 244 or glass 246 before detection by the first and second light detectors 222/224. In another aspect, the sides of the optical filter 244 or glass 246 may be painted black with a light-absorbing coating including, but not limited to, India ink to ensure that light does not reach the first and second light detectors 222/224 without passing through the optical filter 244 or glass 246.
In an aspect, the height of the detection wells 908/910, combined with the diameter of the detector apertures 1004/1006 may limit the fraction of the light emitted from the second region 208 and third region 210 of the patient's skin that reaches the active areas of the light detectors 222/224 due to the Lambertian distribution of the angle of the light leaving the patient's skin. In one aspect, the fraction of light emitted from the second region 208 and third region 210 of the patient's skin received by the light detectors 222/224 may range from about 5% to about 90%. In various other aspects, the fraction of light may range from about 5% to about 15%, from about 10% to about 20%, from about 15% to about 25%, from about 20% to about 30%, from about 25% to about 35%, from about 30% to about 40%, from about 35% to about 45%, from about 40% to about 60%, from about 50% to about 70%, and from about 60% to about 90%.
In one aspect, for the sensor head 204 illustrated in FIG. 6 and FIG. 7 with 1-mm diameter apertures 1002/1004/1006, about 10% of the light emitted from the surface of the patient's skin may reach the active area of the light detectors 222/224 to be detected. In various aspects, the sensor head 204 may further include additional optical elements including, but not limited to, lenses and/or prisms configured to compensate for the Lambertian distribution of light angles in order to enhance the fraction of light emitted from the patient's skin that is directed to the active area of the light detectors 222/224.
iii) Temperature Sensors
Referring to FIG. 2, the sensor head 204 may further include one or more additional temperature sensors 228 configured to monitor temperatures of various regions within the sensor head 204 and in the vicinity of the sensor head 204. Non-limiting examples of suitable regions for which the temperature may be monitored by the one or more additional temperature sensors 228 include: temperature at the skin surface of the patient 202; temperature in the vicinity of the first light source 218 and/or second light source 220; ambient temperature outside of the sensor head 204; temperature of housing 600 of sensor head 204; and any other suitable region. In one aspect, additional temperature sensors 228 may be configured to monitor the temperatures in the vicinity of temperature-sensitive electrical components including, but not limited to: light sources 218/220 such as LEDs, light detectors 222/224 such as silicon photomultipliers (SPMs), and any other temperature-sensitive electrical components of the sensor head 204. In some aspects, one or more temperatures measured by one or more additional temperature sensors 228 may be used as feedbacks in a control method for one or more of the temperature-sensitive devices of the system 200 as described herein below.
By way of non-limiting example, a temperature measurement may be used to control the amount of light energy produced by an LED used as a first or second light source 218/220. In this example, LED temperatures measured by an second temperature sensor 1108 (see FIG. 11) may be used in a control scheme to modulate the amount of power supplied to an LED light source to compensate for the effect of LED temperature on the light output of the LED. In another aspect, additional temperature sensors 228 may monitor the temperatures of LED light sources 218/220 to monitor and/or compensate for temperature variations of the LEDs as well as to monitor and/or compensate for temperature-dependent transmission of the optical filters to maintain relatively constant output wavelengths.
By way of another non-limiting example, an additional temperature sensor 228 may be included in the sensor head 204 in the form of a thermistor 816 (see FIG. 8) configured to monitor the temperature of the housing 600 in the vicinity of the contact surface 606 of the sensor head 204. Referring to FIG. 7, FIG. 8, and FIG. 9, the thermistor 816 may be epoxied into the temperature sensor opening 706 in the aperture plate 702 in one aspect. In this aspect, the space 918 between the circuit board (not shown) and the lower housing 604 may be filled with a thermally conductive putty to ensure good thermal conduction and dissipation.
In this example, the measured housing temperature may be used to modulate the light output of the sensor head 204 to prevent overheating of the skin of the patient 202 during use. In another aspect, additional temperature sensors 228 may monitor the temperatures of LED light sources 218/220 to monitor and/or compensate for temperature variations of the LEDs to enable the maintenance of relatively constant output wavelengths by the LED light sources 218/220.
In an additional aspect, temperatures measured by one or more additional temperature sensors 228 may provide for subject safety by disabling one or more electrical devices including the light sources 218/220 and/or light detectors 222/224 if an over-temperature condition is detected. In one aspect, an over-temperature condition may be indicated if the case temperature detected by the thermistor 816 is greater than about 40° C. In various other aspects, an over-temperature condition may be detected of the case temperature is greater than about 40.5° C. or greater than about 41.0° C.
B. Controller
Referring again to FIG. 2, the system 200 in various aspects may include a controller 212 configured to operate the light sources 218/200 and light detectors 222/224 in a coordinated fashion to obtain a plurality of measurements used to obtain the fluorescence of the exogenous fluorescent agent within the tissues of the patient 202, to correct the fluorescence data to remove the effects of the diffuse reflectance of light as described herein below, and to transform the fluorescence measurements into a parameter representative of the renal function of the patient 202. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of an electronic circuit 1100 that illustrates the arrangement of various electrical components that enable the operation of the system 200 in an aspect. In one aspect, the controller 212 may be a computing device further including an operation unit 214 and a display unit 216.
i) Light Source Control Unit
Referring again to FIG. 2, the controller 212 may include a light source control unit 230 configured to operate the first light source 218 and the second light source 220 to produce light at the excitation wavelength and emission wavelength, respectively in a coordinated manner to produce a repeating pulse sequence as illustrated schematically in FIG. 5. In various aspects, the light source control unit 230 may produce a plurality of light control signals encoding one or more light control parameters including, but not limited to: activation or deactivation of each light source; relative timing of activation and deactivation of each light source to enable light pulse width, pulse repetition rate, electrical power delivered to the light source or other parameter associated with light pulse fluence or light pulse power; other light source-specific parameters controlling the light output of the light source; and any other relevant light control parameter. In an aspect, the light source control unit 230 may receive one or more feedback measurements used to modulate the plurality of control signals to compensate for variations in performance of the light sources in order to maintain a relatively stable output of light from the light sources. Non-limiting examples of feedback measurements used by the light source control unit 230 include: light output of the light sources 218/220 measured within the source well 902 by the first monitor photodiode 904 and the second monitor photodiode 906, respectively, temperatures of the light sources 218/220, and any other feedback measurement relevant to monitoring the performance of light sources 218/220.
By way of non-limiting example, the light source control unit 230 may be configured to operate LED light sources 218/220. In this example, the light output of the LED light sources 218/220 may be controlled by controlling the magnitude of current provided to each LED. In an aspect, the light source control unit 230 may include at least one waveform generator 1122 including, but not limited to, a field programmable gate array FPGA with a 16-bit DAC 1124 operatively coupled to a LED current source 1126, as illustrated in FIG. 11. In an aspect, waveforms generated by the at least one waveform generator 1122 including, but not limited to square waves, may control the output from the LED current source 1126. In an aspect, the magnitude of the current supplied to the LED light sources 218/220 may be adjustable based on the waveform signals provided by the waveform generator/FPGA 1122.
Referring to FIG. 5, in one aspect, each light pulse sequence 500 includes an emission wavelength light pulse 502 and an excitatory wavelength light pulse 504 that are both made up of a plurality of square waves 506 produced by the first and second LED light sources 218/220. Referring to FIG. 11, square waves generated by the waveform generator 1122 are received by the LED current source 1126. The current generated by the LED current source includes a square waveform similar to the waveform generated by the waveform generator 1122. Without being limited to any particular theory, because the intensity of light produced by the LED light sources 218/220 is proportional to the magnitude of the current received, the light produced by the LED light sources 218/220 also includes the square waveform as illustrated in FIG. 5. In another aspect, discussed in additional detail below, the square waves produced by the waveform generator 1122 may also be used by the acquisition unit 234 in a synchronous detection method to reduce the effects of various confounding factors including, but not limited to, the detection of ambient light, from the detector signals generated by the light detectors 222/224 during illumination of the tissues of the patient at the emission and excitatory wavelengths by the first and second light sources 218/220, respectively.
In various other aspects, a variety of alternate LED pulse modulation schemes may be equivalently employed without limitation. In one aspect, the excitation and emission pulses are delivered in an alternating series interspersed with a dark period after each pulse. In another aspect, the first and second LED light sources 218/220 are each modulated with a 50% duty cycle but at different modulation frequencies, allowing the signals associated with the excitation and emission pulses to be separated by frequency filtering.
Without being limited to any particular theory, the overall optical power delivered to the patient's skin may be limited by at least two factors: photobleaching of the exogenous fluorescent agent and/or endogenous chromophores, as well as overheating of the patient's tissues illuminated by the system 200. In one aspect, tissue heating may impose an absolute limit of about 9 mW on the optical power that can be delivered to the skin, based on safety standards including, but not limited to, ANSI/IESNA RP-27.1-05. In another aspect, photobleaching of the skin autofluorescence associated with endogenous chromophores including, but not limited to, collagen, hemoglobin, and melanin may contribute a background signal to the measured fluorescence that remains relatively constant so long as no autobleaching of the chromophores occurs. This constant autofluorescence background may be subtracted from the raw fluorescence signal, but if autofluorescence varies over time due to photobleaching, this background correction may interfere with the kinetic calculation of the renal decay time constant (RDTC). In an aspect, the light output power of the first light source 218 and/or second light source 220 may be limited to levels below power thresholds associated with chromophore photobleaching.
Referring again to FIG. 9, the light output of the light sources 218/220 may be measured using monitor photodiodes 904/906 in various aspects. Because the light intensity reaching these monitor photodiodes 904/906 is typically much stronger than the light intensity that reaches the light detectors 222/224 through the patient's skin, less sensitive light detecting devices including, but not limited to, PIN photodiodes may be used to monitor the output of the light sources 218/220.
In various aspects, the system 200 may be configured to operate over a range of skin tones observed in the human population. Without being limited to any particular theory, variations in skin tones between different patients 202 may result in variations in the detected fluorescence signals ranging over about three orders of magnitude. In addition, variations in the concentrations of exogenous fluorescent agent within each patient 202 may vary over a range of about two orders of magnitude due to renal elimination of the agent over time. In various aspects, the system 200 may be configured to detect fluorescence from the endogenous fluorescent agent over an intensity range of more than five orders of magnitude. In these various aspects, the system 200 may be configured by modulation of at least one operational parameter including, but not limited to: magnitude of light output by the light sources 218/220 and sensitivity of light detectors 222/224 corresponding to detector gains.
In one aspect, the intensity of the light output by the light sources 218/220 may be manually set by a user via the operation unit 214. In another aspect, the light source control unit 230 may be configured to modulate the intensity of light produced by the light sources 218/220 automatically. In an aspect, the light source control unit 230 may be configured to control the light intensity produced by the LED light sources 218/220 within a range of normalized output intensities from 0 (off) to 1 (maximum power). In an aspect, the intensity of the light sources 218/220 may be set by the light source control unit 230 in coordination with the detector gains of the light detectors 222/224 set by the light detector control unit 232, as described herein below.
In one aspect, signals obtained during the first 10 detection cycles obtained by the system 200 after initialization of data acquisition, but prior to the injection of the exogenous fluorescent agent, may be used by the light source control unit 230 to automatically adjust the light intensity produced by the LED light sources 218/220, as well as the gain of the light detectors 222/224. In this example, the initial detection cycle may be obtained with the LED light sources 218/220 set at about 10% of maximum LED intensity (corresponding to a normalized output intensity of 0.1) and with a low gain setting for the light detectors 222/224. Based on the detected intensity of light received at the light detectors 222/224 at the excitation and emission wavelengths for one detection cycle, the corresponding LED intensities may be modulated to enable the analog signals produced by the light detectors 222/224 to correspond to about ¼ of the full range of each detector analog-to-digital convertor (ADC) at the low detector gain setting. If the signals produced by the light detectors 222/224 in response to the light produced by the second LED light source 220 at the emission wavelength do not agree, the larger signal may be used to modulate the power setting of the second LED light source 220. If the method described above results in modulation to an LED intensity setting higher than the maximum intensity (corresponding to a normalized output intensity of 0.1), the LED intensity setting is set to the maximum setting. Without being limited to any particular theory, the targeted levels of signals produced by the light detectors 222/224 (i.e. ¼ of the ADC range) is selected to reserve additional light detection capacity to detect signals resulting from variations in optical properties of the tissues of the patient 202 during the study due to any one or more of a plurality of factors including, but not limited to, the introduction of the exogenous fluorescent agent into the patient 202.
In the above one aspect, once the LED intensities are set by the light source control unit 230 in coordination with the detector gains of the light detectors 222/224 set by the light detector control unit 232 over the first 10 detection cycles, an additional 10 detection cycles are obtained to confirm the suitability of these settings for operation of the system 200 given the tissue properties of the particular patient 202, followed by a recalculation of the LED intensity settings and detector gains as described herein. If the newly calculated LED intensity is within a factor of two of the previously determined setting, and the detector gains are not changed, the previously determined settings are maintained for subsequent data acquisition cycles used to determine renal function. Otherwise, the settings are updated using the same method described herein and another 10 data acquisition cycles conducted to confirm the stability of the settings. This process repeats until either the settings are determined to be acceptably stable or 10 data acquisition cycles are conducted to obtain the settings, in which case the most recently determined settings are used for all subsequent data acquisitions, and the user may be notified via the display unit 216 that the settings may not be optimal.
ii) Light Detector Control Unit
Referring again to FIG. 2, the controller 212 may include a light detector control unit 232 configured to operate the first light detector 222 and the second light detector 224 to enable the detection of light at the emission wavelength and unfiltered light at all wavelengths, respectively. In various aspects, the light detector control unit 232 may produce a plurality of detector control signals encoding one or more detector control parameters including, but not limited to, detector gains. In various other aspects, the light detector control unit 232 may produce a plurality of light measurement signals encoding the intensity of light detected by the light detectors 222/224 including, but not limited to raw detector signals that may be received by an analog-to-digital convertor (ADC) 1102 (see FIG. 11) in various aspects. In another aspect, the detector gains and/or other detector control signals may be manually set by a user detector gains when the system 200 is configured in an Engineering Mode.
In various other aspects, the amount of light received by the light detectors 222/224 may vary due to any one or more of at least several factors including, but not limited to: variation in skin tones observed between individual patients 202, variations in the concentrations of exogenous fluorescent agent within each patient 202, and any other relevant parameter. In one aspect, gains of the first light detector 222 and the second light detector 224 may be set by a user via the operation unit 214. In another aspect, the light detector control unit 232 may be configured to modulate the gain of the light detectors 222/224 automatically via a bias voltage gain of the bias voltage generator 1112 (see FIG. 11).
In one aspect, signals obtained during the first 10 detection cycles obtained by the system 200 after initialization of data acquisition, but prior to the injection of the exogenous fluorescent agent, may be used by the light detector control unit 232 to automatically adjust the gains of the light detectors 222/224, as well as the output intensities of the light sources 218/220. As described herein previously, the initial detection cycle may be obtained with the LED light sources 218/220 set at about 10% of maximum LED intensity (corresponding to a normalized output intensity of 0.1) and with a low gain setting for the light detectors 222/224 and the LED intensities may be modulated to enable the analog signals produced by the light detectors 222/224 to correspond to about ¼ of the full range of each detector analog-to-digital convertor (ADC) at the low detector gain setting.
In this one aspect, if the intensity of the first LED light source 218 (producing light at the excitation wavelength) is set to the maximum of the LED power range, a high detector gain may be considered for the second light detector 224 corresponding to the filtered measurements of the excitation wavelength only. In various aspects, the high detector gain may be 10-fold higher than the corresponding low detector gain for a given light detector. Without being limited to any particular theory, the expected peak detected fluorescence signal from the exogenous fluorescence agent over the course of injection and renal elimination is typically expected to be about 10% of the magnitude of the signal received during illumination at the excitation wavelength by the first light source 218, assuming that the exogenous fluorescence agent is MB-102 introduced into the patient 202 at a dose level of about 4 μmol/kg of patient weight. In an aspect, if the expected detector signal received during illumination at maximum LED intensity and with the detector gain set to the high setting remains below 10% of the range of the detector ADC, the detector gain for that measurement be increased by ten-fold. In another aspect, the saturation condition may persist for a pre-defined period of time including, but not limited to, a 30-second period before adjustments are made to the detector gain or LED power to avoid reacting to spurious signal spikes.
In another aspect, the light detector control unit 232 may adjust the detector gain to a lower gain level if the detected light signals from one of the light detectors 222/224 exceed a threshold percentage of the maximum ADC range to avoid signal saturation. Although the highest threshold percentage of the maximum ADC range associated with signal saturation is 100%, the onset of severe detector non-linearity takes place at threshold percentages of about 40% or more, and mild detector non-linearity occurs at threshold percentages in excess of about 15%. In various aspects, the threshold percentage of the maximum ADC range may be 40%, 35%, 30%, 25%, 20%, 18%, 17%, 16%, 15%, 14%, 13%, 12%, 11%, 10%, 9%, 8%, 7%, 6%, or 5% of the maximum ADC range. In one aspect, if the detected light signals from one of the light detectors 222/224 exceed about 8% of the maximum ADC range, the gain setting will be adjusted. By way of non-limiting example, if the detector gain on the nearly saturated signal is high, it will be adjusted to low. If the current detector gain is set to low and the corresponding detected light signal remains above the threshold percentage of the maximum ADC range, the LED output power setting of the corresponding LED light source may be reduced ten-fold.
In an aspect, the light detector control unit 232 may receive one or more feedback measurements used to modulate the plurality of detector signals to compensate for variations in the performance of the light detectors due to variations in temperature and/or light source output. Non-limiting examples of feedback measurements used by the light detector control unit 232 include: light output of the light sources 218/220 measured within the source well 902 by the first monitor photodiode 904 and the second monitor photodiode 906, respectively (see FIG. 11), temperatures of the light detectors 222/224 measured by a first temperature sensor 1106, LED temperatures measured by a second temperature sensor 1108, temperature of the sensor head housing measured by a third temperature sensor 1128, LED supply current from the LED current source 1126, and any other feedback measurement relevant to monitoring the performance of light detectors 222/224.
In various aspects, the light detectors 222/224 may be silicon photon multiplier (SPM) detectors that may include low-noise internal amplification, and may function at lower light levels relative to other light sensor devices such as PIN photodiodes. The detector signal generated by the SPM detectors 222/224 may be amplified using transimpedance amplifiers 1120/1118, respectively (see FIG. 11) to translate a current generated by each SPM light detector 222/224 into a measurable detector voltage. The transimpedance amplifier 1118 on the second SPM light detector 224 (i.e. detects filtered lights at the excitation wavelength only) may include a switchable detector gain that may select a low gain configured to detect a larger dynamic range for fluorescence measurements when the first LED light source 218 is activated to produce light at the emission wavelength. The switchable detector gain that may further select a high gain setting for the second SPM light detector 224 when the second light source 220 is inactive to enhance the sensitivity of the second SPM light detector 224 during the phase of the detection cycle when light at the emission wavelength produced by the exogenous fluorescent agent within the tissues of the patient 202 is detected, to ensure that the expected dark current from the second SPM light detector 224 occupies less than ¼ of the total ADC output range. In one aspect, the second transimpedance amplifier of the second SPM light detector 224 may include a low detector gain configured to provide a transimpedance gain of about 4 kΩ corresponding to about twice the value of the transimpedance resistor due to differential operation, and may further include a high detector gain configured to provide a transimpedance gain of about 40 kΩ In another aspect, the first transimpedance amplifier of the first SPM light detector 222 may include a fixed detector gain configured to provide a transimpedance gain of about 2 kΩ.
iii) Acquisition Unit
Referring again to FIG. 2, the controller 212 may further include an acquisition unit 234 in various aspects. The acquisition unit 234 may be configured to receive a plurality of signals from the light sources 218/220, light detectors 222/224, and additional light detectors 226 and additional temperature sensors 228 and processing the plurality of signals to produce one or more raw signals including, but not limited to, raw fluorescence signals encoding the intensity of fluorescence detected by the second light detector 224 during illumination at the excitation wavelength, and raw internal reflectance signals corresponding to the intensity of light at the excitation wavelength detected by the first light detector 222 during illumination at the excitation wavelength as well as the intensity of light at the emission wavelength detected by the both light detectors 222/224 during illumination at the emission wavelength.
The plurality of signals received from the various sensors and devices described herein above are typically analog signals including, but not limited to, electrical voltages and currents. In various aspects, the acquisition unit 234 may enable the transmission of the analog signals to one or more analog-to-digital converters (ADCs) to convert the analog signals into digital signals for subsequent processing by the processing unit 236. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of a circuit 1100 illustrating the arrangement of various electrical devices and components of the sensor head 204. In one aspect, the analog signals encoding the intensity of light detected by the first light detector 222 and the second light detector 224 may be received by a first ADC 1102.
In various aspects, the analog signals produced by the light detectors 222/224 and various monitor sensors may be digitized using at least one 24-bit Sigma-Delta ADC. Referring again to FIG. 11, analog signals encoding the measurements from time-sensitive sensors may be digitized using a high-speed 24-bit Sigma-Delta ADC 1102 in one aspect. In this aspect, time-sensitive sensors include sensors associated with the production and detection of light pulses characterized by potentially rapidly-changing signals. Non-limiting examples of time-sensitive sensors of the system 200 include: first and second light detectors 1118/1120, and first and second monitor photodiodes 904/906. In another aspect, analog signals encoding the measurements from less time-sensitive sensors may be digitized using a low-speed 24-bit Sigma-Delta ADC 1104. In this other aspect, the less time-sensitive sensors include sensors associated with monitoring system conditions characterized by typically slow-changing signals including, but not limited to, temperatures of various system components and/or regions. Non-limiting examples of less time-sensitive sensors of the system 200 include: a first and second thermistor 1106/1108 configured to monitor the temperatures of the light sensors 222/224 and light sources 218/220, respectively, and a third temperature sensor 1128 configured to monitor a temperature of the housing 600 of the sensor head 204.
In various aspects, the acquisition unit 234 may be further configured to enable synchronous detection of light by detectors 222/224. Without being limited to any particular theory, synchronous detection methods are thought to reject noise from the detector signals associated with the detection of light produced by the light sources 118/120 and fluorescence produced by the exogenous fluorescent agents within the tissues of the patient 202 by distinguishing the detector signals from noise associated with the detection of ambient light or other sources of interference.
FIG. 12 is a schematic illustration of a synchronous detection method in one aspect. Referring to FIG. 11 and FIG. 12, the waveform generator/FPA 1122 may generate a digital square wave 1202 that is received by the DAC 1124, and the resulting analog-converted square wave is received by the LED current source 1126. The resulting current produced by the LED current source 1126, also characterized by a waveform proportional to the analog-converted square wave drives LED light sources 218/220. The light produced by LED light sources 218/220, after passing through the tissues of the patient 202 are detected, along with the fluorescence produced by the endogenous fluorescent agent, by the light detectors 222/224 and are digitized by the high-speed ADC 1102.
Referring again to FIG. 11 and FIG. 12, the digital square wave 1202 generated by the waveform generator/FPA 1122 may also be converted by a DAC 1110 (see FIG. 11) to an in-phase reference sine wave 1210 and an out-of-phase/quadrature reference cosine wave 1212. In an aspect, the digitized detector signals from the ADC 1102 and the in-phase reference sine wave 1210 may be sampled and subjected to signed multiplication at a first multiplier 1214 to generate a plurality of in-phase modulated signals. In addition, the digitized detector signals and the quadrature reference cosine wave 1212 may be sampled and subjected to signed multiplication at a second multiplier 1216 to generate a plurality of quadrature (out-of-phase) modulated signals. In this aspect, the acquisition unit 234 may delay the samples from the reference waves 1210/1214 by an amount equivalent to the relative delay between the DAC 1124 generating the reference waves 1210/1214 and the ADC 1102 digitizing the detector signals to synchronize the reference waves 1210/1214 to the detector data being acquired.
Referring again to FIG. 12, the in-phase modulated signals may be summed in a first accumulator 1218 to generate an in-phase intensity signal 1224. Similarly, the quadrature modulated signals may be summed in a third accumulator 1222 to generate a quadrature intensity signal 1228. The raw digitized detector signal may also be summed in a second accumulator 1220 to generate an average intensity signal 1226. In addition, the in-phase intensity signal 1224 and the quadrature intensity signal 1228 may be root-sum squared to generate a magnitude signal 1230.
Without being limited to any particular theory, the integration interval of the accumulators 1218/1220/1222 may correspond to an integer number of modulation cycles (corresponding to cycles of the digital square wave 1202) to avoid a bias on the measured signal. The phase accumulators 1218/1220/1222 used to control the synchronous detection operates on integer numbers, but the sample clock frequency and the modulation frequency are not integer-divisible, so the number of cycles is not exactly an integer. However, the error associated with this mismatch may be minimized by adjusting the actual modulation frequency to match as closely as possible with the achievable sampling intervals and allocating an appropriate number of bits to the phase accumulator. In one aspect, the error associated with the mismatch between the modulation frequency and the sampling intervals may be on the order of about one part in 106.
In one aspect, the digital square wave 1202 used to modulate the LED light sources 218/220 and to enable synchronous detection method as described herein above is produced at a frequency of about 1 kHz. Without being limited to any particular theory, a square wave was selected as the modulating waveform to enable an enhancement in signal to noise ratio (SNR), as compared to a pure sinusoidal wave as the modulating waveform for the same peak power level.
In another aspect, the acquisition unit 234 may be further configured to enable demodulation of the in-phase intensity signal 1224, average intensity signal 1226, and quadrature intensity signal 1228. In one aspect, the acquisition unit 234 may pick out each component at the fundamental harmonic, which is characterized by an amplitude that is (4/π) times larger than the amplitude of the square wave 1202 used to modulate the intensity signals 1224/1226/1228. In various aspects, to reject 50/60 Hz electrical noise generated by the alternating current electrical power sources, and corresponding 100/120 Hz optical noise generated by ambient light sources powered from those electrical power sources, the integration period of the accumulators 1218/1220/1222 may be selected to be a multiple of 100 ms. In these various aspects, this selected integration period ensures that integration by the accumulators 1218/1220/1222 occurs over an integer number of cycles for the 50, 60, 100, and 120 Hz signals.
iv) Processing Unit
Referring again to FIG. 2, the controller 212 may further include a processing unit 236 configured to apply corrections to the demodulated detector signals and to transform a selected portion of the corrected detector signals into a measure of renal function in various aspects. FIG. 13 is a block diagram illustrating the subunits of processing unit 236 in an aspect. Referring to FIG. 13, the processing unit 236 may include a pre-processing subunit 1302 configured to determine and correct the detector signals to remove signal artifacts associated with a variety of confounding effects including, but not limited to, physiologically-induced signal variations, variations in power supplied to the light sources 218/220, non-linearities in detector response, ambient temperature variation, and tissue heterogeneity. The processing unit 236 may further include a baseline subtraction subunit 1304 configured to remove the portion of the detector signals attributable to extraneous factors such as autofluorescence of the tissues and/or leakage of light at the excitation wavelength through the optical filter 244 of the second light detector 224. The processing unit 236 may additionally include a diffuse reflectance correction subunit 1306 configured to enable a method of applying a diffuse reflectance correction method to remove the effects of the diffuse reflectance of light within the tissues of the patient 202. The processing unit 236 may further include a post-equilibrium selection subunit 1308 configured to select a portion of the detector data associated with the post-agent administration period for subsequent analysis to determine renal function of the patient. The processing unit 236 may further include an RDTC calculation subunit 1310 configured to transform the detector signals obtained over the post-agent administration period to produce a renal decay time constant indicative of the renal function of the patient. The processing unit 236 may also include a fault detection subunit 1312 configured to monitor the magnitudes of the detector signals to detect any malfunctions of the system.
a) Pre-Processing Subunit
In one aspect, the raw signals corresponding to the light intensity detected by light detectors 222/224 corresponding to illumination by the first light source 218 and the second light source 220 at the excitation and emission wavelength, respectively, are pre-processed using various modules of the pre-processing subunit 1302 to remove the effects of a plurality of confounding factors from the raw signals, resulting in signals that more accurately reflect the underlying specific signals of interest.
By way of several non-limiting examples, the intensity of light produced by a light source may vary due to one or more of a plurality of factors including, but not limited to: fluctuations in the electrical current supplied to the light source and variations in the ambient temperature of the light source. Light characterized by two or more wavelengths emanating from the same source aperture of the sensor head may not share the same path to the same detector. The detectors may have thermally-dependent sensitivity and gain. Further, the optical filter associated with the second light detector 224 may have temperature-dependent transmission properties.
In one aspect, the pre-processing subunit 1302 is configured to process the raw signals corresponding to light intensities detected by the first and second light detectors 222/224 in order to remove one or more of the measurement errors associated with the devices and elements of the system 200 and patient-specific factors including, but not limited to, the plurality of factors described above. FIG. 22A is a block diagram illustrating the modules of the pre-processing subunit 1302 in one aspect. FIG. 22B is a block diagram illustrating the modules of the pre-processing subunit 1302 a in a second aspect.
In one aspect, illustrated in FIG. 22A, the pre-processing subunit 1302 1) resamples the signals using the methods of the resampling module 2202 as described below, 2) removes saturated detector signals using the methods of the detector output saturation detection and removal module 2204 as described below, 3) corrects for temperature-dependent detector gain using the methods of the detector temperature correction module 2206 described below, 4) corrects the signals for instrument light directionality using the methods of the light directionality correction module 2208 described below, 5) corrects the signals for filter throughput and temperature-dependent variation of fluorescence light using the methods of the filter throughput temperature correction (emission) module 2212 described below, 6) corrects for tissue heterogeneity using the methods of the tissue heterogeneity correction module 2216 described below, 7) corrects the signals for filter throughput and temperature-dependent variation of excitation light and signal decomposition using the methods of the filter throughput temperature correction (excitation) module and signal decomposition module 2214 as described below, 8) corrects for optical power variation using the methods of the fractional photon normalization module 2218 as described below.
In one aspect, illustrated in FIG. 22B, the pre-processing subunit 1302 a calculates signal magnitudes using the methods of the detector temperature correction module 2206 a as described below, resamples the signals using the methods of the resampling module 2202 a as described below, removes saturated samples using the methods of the detector output saturation detection and removal module 2204 a as described below, corrects the signals for temperature-dependent detector gain using the methods of the detector temperature correction module 2206 a described below, corrects the signals for optical power variation using the methods of the fractional photon normalization module 2218 a as described below, corrects for excitation light leakthrough onto the measured fluorescence signal using the filter throughput temperature correction (excitation) module and signal decomposition module 2214 a as described below, and corrects for fluorescence light leakthrough onto the measured excitation diffuse reflectance signal using the filter throughput temperature correction (emission) module 2212 a as described below.
—Resampling Module
Referring to FIG. 22A and FIG. 22B the pre-processing subunit 1302/1302 a in various aspects includes a resampling module 2202/2202 a configured to reduce signal variations associated with physiological processes of the patient 202 including, but not limited to, heartbeat and breathing. Typically, an acquisition sequence is characterized by alternating interval of illumination at the excitation and emission separated by intervals of no illumination (i.e. dark intervals). Although both illumination intervals (excitation/emission) are time-stamped with the same time-stamp value as described above, the dark interval between the excitation and emission illumination intervals results in a separation interval between the excitation and emission illumination intervals. Without being limited to any particular theory, if the separation interval associated with an acquisition sequence is on the order of a separation interval between physiological events, such as heartbeats or respiration, physiological noise may be introduced to the signals. In various aspects, this physiological noise may be reduced by resampling the signals associated with the excitation and emission illumination to overlap prior to subsequent processing of the signals.
By way of non-limiting example, a sample sequence may include a 100 ms dark interval, a 100 ms interval of illumination at the excitatory wavelength, a second 100 ms dark interval, and a 100 ms interval of illumination at the emission wavelength. Each sample packet is logged with a single timestamp, and each sample packet is separated by a 400 ms interval. Because physiological signal variations, such as from heartbeats, occur on this same timescale, the 200 ms difference between signal acquisition associated with the excitatory and emission wavelengths becomes apparent in the signals. This physiological signal noise may be reduced using the pre-processing subunit 1302 by first resampling the signals associated with illumination at the excitatory and emission wavelength illumination to overlap prior to performing any additional signal processing as described below. In this non-limiting example, the signals associated with illumination at the excitatory wavelength may be shifted forward by 100 ms and the signals associated with illumination at the emission wavelength may be shifted backwards by 100 ms, resulting in an overlap of the signals.
In various aspects, the resampling module 2202 performs resampling as described above on signals detected by both the first and second detectors 222/224. In one aspect, the resampling module 2202 functions as a form of low-pass filter.
—Detector Output Saturation Detection and Removal Module
Referring again to FIG. 22A and FIG. 22B the pre-processing subunit 1302/1302 a in various aspects includes a detector output saturation detection and removal module 2204/2204 a configured to detect and remove signal values that fall outside the detection range of the light detectors 222/224. In one aspect, the pre-processing subunit 1302 compares the detected signals to the maximum ADC signal. If any signal falls within a threshold range of the maximum ADC signal using the average or peak signal value, the detector output saturation detection and removal module 2204 identifies and removes that value from further processing.
—Detector Temperature Correction Module
FIG. 22A and FIG. 22B the pre-processing subunit 1302/1302 a in various aspects includes a detector temperature correction module 2206/2206 a configured to enable a temperature correction to compensate for the thermal sensitivity of the light detectors 222/224. In one aspect, the intrinsic detector gain for a silicon photomultiplier (SPM) device typically used as a light detector is proportional to the difference between the device breakdown voltage and the bias voltage applied by the bias voltage generator 1112 (see FIG. 11), referred to herein as an overvoltage. In this aspect, the breakdown voltage varies with temperature in a well-characterized manner. In one aspect, the temperature correction accounts for both this internal detector gain variation and additionally temperature-related variation in the photon detection efficiency.
In one aspect, the temperature correction may be a scaling correction applied to the detector measurements in which the scaling correction is based on a measured detector temperature. In an aspect, the measured light detector signals may be divided by the calculated gain G(t) to remove the temperature dependency. The scaling correction G(t) may be calculated according to Eqn. (2):
G(T)=C v ·V bias −V breakdown(1+C T)T-T 0  Eqn. (2)
In Eqn. (2), the monitor temperature T is obtained from a first temperature sensor 1106 (see FIG. 11) configured to monitor the temperature of the sensors 222/224. The bias voltage (Vbias) may be measured by the bias voltage generator 1112. The breakdown voltage (Vbreakdown) and reference temperature (T0) are constants specific to the particular light detector device included in the system 200. By way of non-limiting example, if the light detectors 222/224 are silicon photomultiplier (SPM) devices, Vbreakdown may be 24.5 V and T0 may be 21 degrees C. In another aspect, the coefficients Cv and CT used in Eqn. (2) may be derived empirically based on measurements obtained using a constant phantom over an ambient temperature ranging from about 18 degrees C. to about 26 degrees C.
In another aspect, the temperature portion of the gain correction is determined by the Eqns. (3)-(5).
G useCase = C v · V bias measured - V breakdown ( 1 + C T ) T measured - T 0 Eqn . ( 3 ) G nominal = C v · V bias nominal - V breakdown ( 1 + C T ) T nominal - T 0 Eqn . ( 4 ) G correction = G useCase G nominal Eqn . ( 5 )
This gain correction can be applied to each of the signal magnitudes as measured by the first and second light detectors 222/224 as follows:
SPMmagnitude corrected = SPMmagnitude G correction Eqn . ( 6 )
In an aspect, the magnitudes of the temperature-corrected measurements from each detector and monitor photodiode are calculated from the root sum-squares of the in-phase intensity signals 1224 (I) and quadrature intensity signals 1228 (Q) according to Eqn. (1):
M=√{square root over (I 2 +Q 2)}  Eqn. (1)
The signal magnitudes from the light detectors 222/224 calculated using Eqn. (1) are normalized by the monitor photodiode magnitude for each measurement set corresponding to the measurements obtained during illumination by one of the LED light sources 218/220 at either the excitation or emission wavelength. In one aspect, if one photodiode is positioned in the source well 902, the single photodiode magnitude from the corresponding measurement set is used for this normalization. In another aspect, if two monitor photodiodes 904/906 are positioned in the same source well 902 as both LED light sources 218/220 (see FIG. 9), the average of the two monitor photodiode magnitudes from the corresponding measurement set is used for this normalization.
In an aspect, the in-phase intensity signal 1224, quadrature intensity signal 1228, and average intensity signal 1226 (see FIG. 12) are further processed for the number of accumulated samples and ADC scaling such that the intensity signals 1224/1226/1228 are returned as fraction of the full range of the high-speed ADC 1102 (i.e. ranging from a minimum of 0 to a maximum of 1). The measurements of the monitor photodiodes 904/906 (see FIG. 11) are similarly scaled as a fraction of the full range of the low-speed ADC 1104.
In one aspect, Gcorrection may incorporate a power correction to correct for the effects of fluctuations in the LED power supply. In this aspect, the signals from the first monitor photodiode 904 and the second monitor photodiode 906 are calibrated by measuring optical output power with a power meter as light intensities from the light sources 218/220 are varied. The calibration coefficients for each light source 218/220, Csource1 and Csource2, are calculated as detector-measured milliWatts per recorded monitor photodiode signal value. Csource1 and Csource2 are used to determine the absolute light output into tissue at each wavelength.
Referring again to FIG. 22B, the detector temperature correction module 2206 a corrects signal magnitudes for the varying intensity of the LEDs by normalizing the temperature-corrected detected signals using the LED output signal PDmagnitude measured by the first monitor photodiode 904 and/or the second monitor photodiode 906. In this case, the Gcorrection variable for each light source 218/220 from above is amended as follows:
G correction = G useCase G nominal * PD magnitude Eqn . ( 7 )
—Light Directionality Correction Module
Referring again to FIG. 22A, the pre-processing subunit 1302 in this aspect includes a light directionality correction module 2208 configured to enable a correction to variations in the detected signals associated with differences in the scattering and absorption of light of different wavelengths through the tissues of the patient 202 during data acquisition. In one aspect, a correction term for light directionality may be measured by acquiring data from one or more homogeneous tissue phantoms and using a sensor configuration in which no emission filters are present. The ratio of the signals detected by the first light detector 222 (Det1) and the signals detected by the second light detector 224 (Det2) measured are used to determine a coefficient Gex or Gem for signals obtained in association with illumination by light at the excitation and emission wavelengths, respectively. The coefficients are used to modify the signal detected by the first light detector 222. In one aspect, the correction of the signals acquired in a homogeneous medium by the first light detector 222 using the coefficients Gex or Gem render the signals measured by the first and second detectors 222/224, as equivalent to within 20% of one another. In other aspects, the correction of the signals acquired in a homogeneous medium by the first light detector 222 using the coefficients Gex or Gem render the signals measured by the first and second detectors 222/224 as equivalent to within about 10%, to within about 5%, to within about 2%, and to within about 1%.
—Detector Non-Linear Response Correction Module
Referring again to FIG. 22A, the pre-processing subunit 1302 in this aspect includes a detector non-linear response correction module 2210 configured to enable a correction to variations in the detected signals associated with non-linear response of the detectors. In this aspect, a calibration curve based on average data may be used to scale the magnitude data obtained by the detectors 222/224.
—Filter Throughput Temperature Correction (Emission) Module
Referring again to FIG. 22A, the pre-processing subunit 1302 in this aspect includes a filter throughput temperature correction (emission) module 2212 configured to enable a correction to variations in the detected signals associated with temperature-dependent optical properties of the optical filter 244 associated with the second light detector 224 during emission-wavelength illumination. In this aspect, the signals Det2 detected by the second light detector 224 may be corrected according to Eqn. (8):
Det 2 = Det 2 - Det 2 ( C emF , slopeT ( T - T nom ) ) C emF , nom Eqn . ( 8 )
In various aspects, the signal Det2 measured by the second light detector 224 may be monitored while ambient temperature is cycled over a range including the operating temperature range or a large enough subset of the range to adequately determine the temperature-dependence of the emission filter. These data are acquired with the optical filter 244 installed on the second light detector 224 from a homogeneous, non-fluorescent phantom. Further, simultaneous measurements are monitored from the first light detector 222, and a ratio of the measurements Det2/Det1 is determined. The nominal filter coefficient, CemF,nom is calculated as the nominal ratio of Det2/Det1 obtained at a nominal operating temperature Tnom. In this aspect, the coefficient CemF,slopeT is obtained from the slope of Det2/Det1 obtained over a range of ambient temperatures during emission-wavelength illumination of the homogeneous, non-fluorescent phantom.
—Tissue Heterogeneity Correction Module
Referring again to FIG. 22A, the pre-processing subunit 1302 in this aspect includes a tissue heterogeneity correction module 2216 configured to enable a correction to variations in the detected signals associated with heterogeneity of the tissues intervening between the first region 206 illuminated by light sources 218/220 and the second and third regions 208/210 at which the light detectors 222/224 are positioned. In this aspect, the signal Det1 corrected for light directionality by the light directionality correction module 2208 and the signal Det2 corrected for filter effects by the filter throughput temperature correction (emission) module 2212 are used to calculate Chetero, a coefficient to correct for tissue heterogeneity, according to Eqn. (9):
C hetero=Det2/Det1  Eqn. (9)
—Filter Throughput Temperature Correction (Excitation) and Signal Decomposition Module
Referring again to FIG. 22A, the pre-processing subunit 1302 in this aspect includes a filter throughput temperature correction (excitation) module and signal decomposition module 2214 configured to enable a correction to variations in the detected signals associated with temperature-dependent optical properties of the optical filter 244 associated with the second light detector 224 during excitation-wavelength illumination. In this aspect, because the emission filter is configured to block light at the excitation wavelength, the filter throughput temperature correction (excitation) module and signal decomposition module 2214 performs a correction to variance to the amount of excitation light leakthrough due to temperature-related changes in the optical properties of the optical filter 244. Further, the filter throughput temperature correction (excitation) module and signal decomposition module 2214 enables corrections of the signals measured by the first light detector 222 during excitation-wavelength illumination due to the presence of fluorescence induced by the excitation-wavelength illumination superimposed over the portion of the signal associated with the excitation-wavelength illumination.
In this aspect, the effects of temperature-dependent variation on leakthrough of excitation-wavelength by the optical filter 244 are calculated as expressed in Eqn. (10):
C exLT =C exLT,nom +C exLT,slopeT(T−T nom)  Eqn. (10)
In this aspect, CexLT,nom is calculated from the ratio of signals Det1 and Det2 measured from a homogeneous, non-fluorescent phantom at the nominal operating temperature Tnom during excitation-wavelength illumination. CexLT,slopeT is calculated as the slope of the signal Det2 measured from a homogeneous, non-fluorescent phantom at a range of operating temperatures T during excitation-wavelength illumination.
In this aspect, the filter throughput temperature correction (excitation) module and signal decomposition module 2214 further performs a signal extraction to isolate portions of the detected signals associated with diffuse reflectance of the excitation-wavelength illumination and fluorescence. DRex2, which is the amount of excitation light impingent on the second light detector 224 in the absence of an optical filter 244, is not measurable, due to the presence of the optical filter 244. Further, the signal Det1 measured by the first light detector 222 is a composite signal from both diffuse reflectance of the excitation-wavelength illumination DRex1 and fluorescence Flr1. CHetero is obtained using the tissue heterogeneity correction module 2216 as described above. The underlying signals are extracted by use of the following system of equations:
Det2 =C exLT DR ex2 +Flr2  Eqn. (11)
Det1 =DR ex1 +Flr 1  Eqn. (12)
Flr 2 =C Hetero Flr 1  Eqn. (13)
DR ex2 =C Hetero DR ex1  Eqn. (14)
In this aspect, Flr2 is determined by solving the above system of equations using only measurable signals Det1 and Det2 as demonstrated below:
Det 2 = C exLT C Hetero DR ex 1 + Flr 2 Eqn . ( 15 ) Det 2 = C exLT C Hetero ( Det 1 - Flr 1 ) + Flr 2 Eqn . ( 16 ) Det 2 = C exLT C Hetero Det 1 - C exLT C Hetero Flr 1 + Flr 2 Eqn . ( 17 ) Det 2 - C exLT C Hetero Det 1 = Flr 2 ( 1 - C exLT ) Eqn . ( 18 ) Flr 2 = Det 2 - C exLT C Hetero Det 1 1 - C exLT Eqn . ( 19 )
In this aspect, once Flr2 is obtained as described above, the other signals Flr1, DRex1, and DRex2 may be readily obtained through insertion into the system of equations (Eqns. (11)-(14)) presented above.
—Fractional Photon Normalization Module
Referring again to FIG. 22A, the pre-processing subunit 1302 in this aspect includes a fractional photon normalization module 2218 configured to convert the detector signals, after preprocessing as described above, into units of fractional photons for use in subsequent background subtraction and intrinsic fluorescence correction algorithms as described herein. In this aspect, the detector signals may be converted to photocurrent by reversing the scaling associated with the ADC and the transimpedance amplifier used to acquire the detected signals to obtain the signals in units of photocurrents. Once photocurrent is obtained, a detector responsivity supplied by the light detector's manufacturer is used to convert the detector photocurrents to units of Watts. The detector signals in Watts are then ratioed to the source power in Watts as measured by additional light detectors 226 used to monitor the output of the light sources 218/220 to obtain the number of fractional photons detected.
—Optical Power Correction Module
Referring again to FIG. 22A and FIG. 22B, the pre-processing subunit 1302/1302 a in this aspect includes a fractional photon normalization module 2218/2218 a configured to convert the detector signals, after preprocessing as described above, into units of fractional photons for use in subsequent background subtraction and intrinsic fluorescence correction algorithms as described herein. In this aspect, the detector signals may be converted to photocurrent by reversing the scaling associated with the ADC and the transimpedance amplifier used to acquire the detected signals to obtain the signals in units of photocurrents. Once photocurrent is obtained, a detector responsivity supplied by the light detector's manufacturer is used to convert the detector photocurrents to units of Watts. The detector signals in Watts are then ratioed to the source power in Watts as measured by additional light detectors 226 used to monitor the output of the light sources 218/220 to obtain the number of fractional photons detected.
—Excitation Light Leakthrough Subtraction Module
Referring again to FIG. 22B, the pre-processing subunit 1302 a in this aspect includes excitation light leakthrough subtraction module 2222 configured to perform an excitation leakthrough subtraction on the Flrmeas signal. To arrive at a fluorescence signal due only to fluorescent photons (Flrphotons), an excitation leakthrough subtraction is performed. To remove the contribution of excitation light, the excitation leakthrough is taken to be a fraction of the diffuse reflectance excitation (DRex meas ) signal, where a universal calibration factor, CExLT, determines the fraction of the signal to subtract from Flrmeas as expressed below:
ExLT=C ExLT *DR ex meas
where CExLT is a calibration factor that is obtained by computing the ratio between the excitation light detected by both detectors on a non-fluorescing optical phantom as described below:
C ExLT = Flr meas DR ex meas
This signal is then subtracted from Flrmeas to provide a fluorescence signal due only to fluorescent photons as expressed below:
Flr photons =Flr meas −ExLT
—Fluorescence Light Leakthrough Subtraction Module
Referring again to FIG. 22B, the pre-processing subunit 1302 a in this aspect includes a fluorescence light leakthrough subtraction module 2224 a configured to perform a fluorescence leakthrough subtraction on the Flrmeas signal. To obtain the diffuse reflectance, defined herein as the excitation signal due to only excitation photons (DRex photons ), a fluorescence leakthrough subtraction is performed. To remove the fluorescence leakthrough, a calibration factor, CFlrLT, was determined based on the relationship between the amount of fluorescence leakthrough observed on a database of human subject data and tissue heterogeneity as measured by the relationship between the diffuse reflectance, emission signals
( DRemFilt DRem ) .
The relationship is a linear relation as expressed below:
C FlrLT = p 1 * ( DRem DRemFilt ) + p 2
where p1 and p2 are approximately 0.61 and 0.01, respectively, in one aspect, as determined by the above-mentioned relationship. In another aspect, p1 and p2 may assume any other value without limitation as defined by the above relationship.
The DRex photons signal is then calculated by subtracting this fraction of measured fluorescence from the diffuse reflectance excitation signal, as follows:
DR ex photons =DR ex meas −Flr meas *C FlrLT
b) Baseline Subtraction Subunit
Referring again to FIG. 13, the processing unit 236 further includes a baseline subtraction subunit 1304. In an aspect, the baseline subtraction subunit 1304 subtracts a baseline signal from the light detector measurements to correct for the effects of autofluorescence and light leakage. The baseline period, as used herein, refers to an initial time period of measurements obtained prior to injection of the exogenous fluorescent agent. During the baseline period, the fluorescence signal measured by the system 200 may be assumed to associated with tissue autofluorescence and/or excitation light from the LED light sources 218/220 leaking through the absorption filter 244 of the second light detector 224. In an aspect, the average signal measured during the baseline period, referred to herein as a baseline signal, may be subtracted from subsequent fluorescence measurements to yield a measurement associated solely with the fluorescence produced by the exogenous fluorescent agent within the tissues of the patient.
In another aspect, the corrections for excitation light leak-through and autofluorescence may be implemented separately. In this other aspect, a subtraction of the effects of excitation light leak-through may be performed prior to the diffuse reflectance correction described herein below, and a subtraction of the effects of autofluorescence may be performed after the diffuse reflectance correction.
c) Diffuse Reflectance Correction Subunit
Referring again to FIG. 13, the processing unit 236 further includes a diffuse reflectance correction subunit 1306. In an aspect, the diffuse reflectance correction subunit 1306 may correct the measured fluorescence data to remove the effects of changes to the optical properties (absorption and scattering) of the tissues of the patient 202 during monitoring of renal extraction of an exogenous fluorescent agent within the tissues of a patient. As described herein above, the optical properties of the tissues may change due to any one or more factors including, but not limited to: vasodilation, vasoconstriction, oxygen saturation, hydration, edema, and any other suitable factor within the region of interest monitored by the system, associated with changes in the concentrations of endogenous chromophores such as hemoglobin and melanin.
Without being limited to any particular theory, the fluorescence measurements obtained by the system 200 that are used to determine renal function include emission-wavelength photons that are detected by the second (filtered) light detector 224. These emission-wavelength photons are emitted by the exogenous fluorescence agent introduced into the tissues of the patient in response to illumination by excitation-wavelength photons. The emission-wavelength photons travel from the fluorescence source (i.e. the exogenous fluorescence agent) to the second (filtered) light detector 224 through third region 210 of the patient's skin. However, the emission-wavelength light that is detected by the second (filtered) light detector 224 may also include autofluorescence emitted by endogenous fluorophores such as keratin and collagen within the tissues of the patient, as well as leak-through of excitatory-wavelength light through the optical filter 244 of the second light detector 224. The excitation-wavelength photons that induce fluorescence of the exogenous fluorescent agent are produced by the first light source 218 and are directed into the first region 206 of the patient's skin. If the optical properties of the patient's skin (scattering and/or absorption) varies over the time interval at which the detector data used to determine renal function is acquired (i.e. from a few hours to about 24 hours or more), the accuracy of the fluorescence measurements may be impacted, as discussed previously above.
During each measurement cycle in an aspect, the system 200 may direct light into the first region 206 of the patient's skin with a pulse of emission-wavelength light and a pulse of excitation-wavelength light in an alternating series and may detect all light emerging from the second region of the patients skin using the first (unfiltered) light detector 222 and a portion of the light emerging from the third region 210 of the patient's skin using the second (filtered) light detector 224. The light intensity detected by each combination of excitation and emission wavelength illumination of the first region 206 and detection by the unfiltered/filtered light detectors 222/224 contain information not only about the concentration of the exogenous fluorescent agent in the patient's tissues, but also information about the optical properties of the patient's skin.
TABLE 2
Light Detector Measurements After Temperature
and Power Fluctuation Corrections
First (Reference) Second (Primary)
Illumination Light Detector Light Detector
wavelength Unfiltered Filtered
Excitation-wavelength Flrmeas Flrmeas
Emission-wavelength DRem DRem,filtered
The primary measurement of fluorescence is Flrmeas, the intensity of fluorescent light measured at the filtered detector.
The diffuse reflectance measurement Flrmeas represents the propagation of photons to the non-filtered arm and is composed primarily of excitation photons.
DRem and DRem,filtered represent the propagation of emission-only photons.
Referring to Table 2, light intensity measured by the second (filtered) light detector 224 during illumination by the excitation-wavelength light captures the raw intensity of light emitted by the exogenous fluorescent agents (Flrmeas) prior to any corrections for tissue optical properties in various aspects. After baseline subtraction corrections as described herein previously, the emission-wavelength light contained in Flrmeas is assumed to originate predominantly from the exogenous fluorescent agent, with only minor contributions due to auto-fluorescence by endogenous chromophores, and is therefore termed Flragent. In an aspect, if no change in the optical properties of the patient's skin is assumed, all autofluorescence contributions would be subtracted off during the baseline correction described herein above.
However, if the optical properties of the patient's skin change during the acquisition of data, slightly more or less of the autofluorescence may emerge from the patient's skin at the emission wavelength, thereby introducing uncertainty into the accuracy of the background subtraction correction performed previously. In addition, varied skin optical properties may further alter the intensity of light at the excitation wavelength reaching the exogenous fluorescent agent, thereby altering the amount of energy absorbed by the exogenous fluorescent agent and the intensity of induced fluorescence from the exogenous fluorescent emitted in response to illumination by the excitation-wavelength light. In various aspects, the remaining three light measurements enable monitoring of the optical properties of the patient's skin and provide data that may be used to adjust for any changes in the optical properties of the patient's skin.
Referring again to Table 2, the represented signals DRexmeas and Flrmeas, which have been corrected for variations in temperature and optical output are further processed to signals attributed only to photons of the desired wavelength prior to applying a diffuse reflectance correction. The number of photons due to either diffuse reflectance, excitation or fluorescence on either detector depends on light directionality and the gain of the detector at the detected wavelength, as shown below:
DRex meas =A 1 *DRex photons +B 1 *Flr photons
Flr meas =A 2 *DRex photons +B 2 *Flr photons
where the coefficients A1, A2, B1, B2 are composed of a directionality and gain factor, e.g. A1=d450SPM1*GSPM1@450
Isolation of the signals arising from fluorescence emission and diffuse reflectance, excitation wavelength photons is performed as follows:
B 1 ( B 2 B 1 - A 2 A 1 ) Flr photons = Flr meas - A 2 A 1 DR ex meas A 2 ( A 1 A 2 - B 1 B 2 ) DRex photons = DR ex meas - B 1 B 2 Flr meas
Since the renal function monitor measures rate, which is independent of magnitude, the constant terms in front of the photons signals
( e . g . B 1 ( B 2 B 1 - A 2 A 1 ) )
are not needed, as demonstrated below.
IF = C 0 + C 1 e - t / τ -> log ( IF ) = log ( C 1 ) - 1 t
As such, the terms
A 2 A 1 ( or C ExLT ) and B 1 B 2 ( or C FlrLT )
can be determined experimentally to isolate Flrphotons and DRexphotons, respectively.
The table below represents the names of the signals used to represent each of the four measured signals in the diffuse reflectance correction development. Note that either of the described preprocessing paths can be followed to arrive at signals that can be used to develop the correction.
TABLE 3
Light Detector Measurements Used to Obtain
Fluorescence Measurements Corrected
for Variable Tissue Optical Properties
Generic signal name Preprocessed signals for use
DRex DRex photons or DRex 2
Flr Flrphotons or Flr2
DRem DRem
DRem,filtered DRem,filtered
    • where either of the excitation wavelength signals may be used as alternate methods for obtaining a diffuse reflectance correction with either of the described pre-processing methods.
Referring again to Table 2, light intensity measured by the first (unfiltered reference) light detector 222 during illumination by excitation-wavelength light captures a measure of the diffuse reflectance of excitation-wavelength light propagated through the patient's skin (DRex meas ). Although the first light detector 222 is configured to detect both excitation-wavelength and emission-wavelength light, the intensity of the excitation-wavelength light is orders of magnitude higher than the intensity of the emission-wavelength light as a result of the lower efficiency of producing light via fluorescence. In various aspects, the proportion of emission-wavelength light within DRex meas is assumed to be negligible. In other aspects, the proportion of emission-wavelength light within DRex meas is estimated and subtracted. Without being limited to any particular theory, because the intensity of the excitation-wavelength light directed into the patient's skin is assumed to be relatively constant with negligible losses due to absorption by the exogenous fluorescent agent, and is subject to power corrections as described herein previously, DRex meas serves as a benchmark measurement to assess changes in the optical properties of the patient's skin with respect to the excitation-wavelength light.
Light intensity measured by the first (unfiltered reference) light detector 222 during illumination by emission-wavelength light captures a measure of the diffuse reflectance of emission-wavelength light propagated through the patient's skin (DRem). Without being limited to any particular theory, because the exogenous fluorescent agent is not induced to emit emission-wavelength light due to the absence of excitation-wavelength illumination during this phase of the data acquisition cycle, and because the intensity of the emission-wavelength light directed into the patient's skin is relatively constant and subject to power corrections as described herein previously, DRem serves as a benchmark measurement to assess changes in the optical properties of the patient's skin with respect to the emission-wavelength light.
Light intensity measured by the second (filtered) light detector 224 during illumination by emission-wavelength light captures a second measure of the diffuse reflectance of emission-wavelength light propagated through the patient's skin (DRem,filtered). In one aspect, DRem,filtered is subject to the same assumptions as DRem as described herein above. In addition, DRem,filtered provides a means of assessing heterogeneity of the tissue's optical properties. Because DRem,filtered is measured by the second light detector 224 configured to detect light emerging from the patient's skin at the third region 210 (see FIG. 2), the intensity of light measured in DRem,filtered has propagated along an optical path through the skin of the patient that is different from the optical path traveled by the light measured in DRem. Without being limited to any particular theory, because the distances of the first detector aperture 1004 and second light aperture 2006 through which light is delivered to the first and second light detectors 222/224, respectively are designed to be equidistant from the light delivery aperture 1002 (see FIG. 10), any differences between DRem,filtered and DRem are assumed to be a result of heterogeneity on the optical properties of the skin traversed by the two different optical paths.
In one aspect, the intrinsic fluorescence (IF), defined here as the measured fluorescence at the emission wavelength attributable only to emission by the exogenous fluorescent agent, may be calculated according to Eqn. (20):
IF = F meas DR ex k ex DR em k em DR em , filtered k em , filtered Eqn . ( 20 )
The factors IF, Flr, DRex, DRem and DRem,filtered are defined herein above. As expressed in Eqn. (20), each of the diffuse reflectance correction measurement signals DRex, DRem, and DRem,filtered factors are raised to the powers kex, kem, and kem,filtered respectively. In an aspect, each measurement in Table 2 is subjected to the power/temperature corrections and background subtraction corrections as described herein above (see FIGS. 22A and 22B) before applying the diffuse reflectance correction of Eqn. (20).
In various aspects, the values of kex, kem, and kem,filtered may be determined empirically. Non-limiting examples of suitable empirical methods for determining suitable values for kex, kem, and kem,filtered include a global error map method and a linear regression method, both described in detail herein below.
In one aspect, once the values for each of the powers (kex, kem, kem,filtered) are identified, the same set of exponents may be reused for subsequent measurements of intrinsic fluorescence. Non-limiting examples of applications of the systems and methods described herein in which a set of selected exponents may be reused includes: repeated measurements on the same patient using the same sensor head 204; repeated measurements using the same sensor head on different patients of the same species; repeated measurements using different sensor heads with the same design on patients of the same species; repeated measurements using different sensor heads with different designs on patients of the same species; repeated measurements using different sensor heads with the different designs on patients of the different species; and any other suitable applications of the systems and methods described herein. In another aspect, the exponents may be updated with repeated use of the systems and methods described herein. In this other aspect, new sets of exponents may be determined for each use of the system and methods, and the stored sets of exponents may be periodically or continuously evaluated to assess whether an updated selection of exponents is indicated. By way of non-limiting example, if an analysis of multiple sets of exponents determined that the exponents did not vary outside of a threshold range in previous uses of the system, the system may be used to conduct measurements using the previous set of exponents, a mean/median of all previous sets of exponents, or any other estimate of suitable exponents based on previous values of exponents. In this non-limiting example, if an analysis of multiple sets of previous exponents determined that the exponents varied outside of a threshold range, de novo selection of exponents using one of the methods described herein below may be indicated.
Global Error Map Method
In one aspect, the values of the powers used in Eqn. (20) above are determined empirically using a global error surface method.
A flow chart illustrating the various steps of a global error surface method 1400 is illustrated in FIG. 14. The method in this aspect includes selecting ranges of values for each of the powers (kex, kem, kem,filtered) for each of the diffuse reflectance signals (DRex, DRem, DRem,filtered) are selected by a user at step 1402. In various aspects, the ranges of values for each of the powers may be influenced by any one or more of a variety of factors including, but not limited to: the design of the system 200, including the design of the sensor head 204; the properties of the selected exogenous fluorescent agent such as excitatory/emission wavelengths, absorption efficiency, emission efficiency, and concentration of initial dose in the patient's tissues; the species of the patient 202 and corresponding concentrations of endogenous chromophores; the position of the sensor head 204 on the patient 202; and any other relevant factor.
In one aspect, the method may include choosing a wide range for each coefficient (kex, kem, kem,filtered) and conduct a broad search. The error surfaces from this broad search may be analyzed to locate wells in the error surface and the associated ranges for each of the coefficients. The method in this one aspect includes adapting the ranges of each coefficient to include the regions from the broad search within which wells in the error surface were observed and repeating the analysis. This method may be iterated until a suitably fine resolution is achieved that is capable of accurately capturing the minimum error. In one non-limiting example, for a human patient, the selected ranges of potential factors may be [0,2] for kex, [0,4] for kem, and [−4,0] for kem,filtered.
Referring again to FIG. 14, step sizes may be selected at 1404 for the ranges of values selected at 1402 for each power kex, kem, kem,filtered. In an aspect, the step size for each factor may be selected based on any one or more of at least several factors including, but not limited to: the anticipated sensitivity of the IF values calculated by Eqn. (20) to changes in each factor; a suitable total number of combinations of powers used to calculate IF considered factors including available computational resources, acceptable data processing times, or any other relevant factors; and any other suitable criterion for step size.
In various aspects, the step sizes may be the same value for all powers kex, kem, kem,filtered. By way of non-limiting example, the step size for all powers may be 0.5. In various other aspects, the step sizes may be constant for all values of a single power kex, kem, kem,filtered, but the step sizes selected for each power may be different between different powers. By way of non-limiting example, the selected step size for kex may be 0.01 and the selected step size for kem and kem,filtered may be 0.6. In various additional aspects, the step size within one or more of the powers may vary within the range of values for each power. By way of non-limiting example, the selected step sizes for kex may be non-linearly distributed about the mean value. In this non-limiting example, the vector of potential values for kex may be [0 0.5 0.75 0.9 1 1.1 1.25 1.5 2]. In these various additional aspects, the step size may be reduced within subranges of values for a power for which the IF calculated by Eqn. (20) is predicted to be more sensitive to small changes in that power. Non-limiting examples of suitable varying step sizes within a range of values for a single power include: different step sizes selected by a user, random step sizes, a linear increase and/or decrease in step size, a non-linear distribution of different step sizes such as a logarithmic distribution, an exponential distribution, or any other suitable non-linear distribution of step sizes.
Referring again to FIG. 14, the ranges of exponents selected at 1402, together with the step sizes selected at step 1404, may be used to form vectors of potential values of kex, kem, kem,filtered at 1406. By way of non-limiting example, assuming selected ranges of potential exponents of [0,2] for kex, [0,4] for kem, and [−4,0] for kem,filtered, and assuming a constant step size of 0.5 for all powers, the vectors created at 1406 are:
kex=[0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0] (5 values)
kem=[0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0] (9 values)
kem,filtered=[−4.0 −3.5 −3.0 −2.5 −2.0 −1.5 −1.0 −0.5 −0.0] (9 values)
Referring again to FIG. 14, for each combination of exponents amongst all vectors formed at 1406, IF is calculated from the measurements Flr, DRex, DRem, and DRem,filtered at 1408 using Eqn. (20). For each combination of exponents, a plurality of IF values are calculated at 1408 in which each IF value corresponds to one of the data acquisition cycles (i.e. a single sequence of emission-wavelength illumination followed by excitatory-wavelength illumination as illustrated in FIG. 5). By way of non-limiting example, using the vectors of potential exponents listed herein above, a total of 405 (5*9*9) pluralities of IF signals would be calculated.
In an aspect, the plurality of combinations of potential exponents may be evaluated to select one combination of exponents from the plurality to assign for use in subsequent diffuse reflectance corrections calculated using Eqn. (20). Referring again to FIG. 14, an estimate of error of the corrected Flr signal data (i.e. IF signal data calculated using Eqn. (20)) may be calculated at 1410. Any estimate of error may be calculated at 1410 including, but not limited to, a quantity related to residuals of the IF signal data relative to a curve fit of the IF signal data. Any type of known curve-fitting method may be used to curve-fit the IF signal data including, but not limited to, a single-exponential curve fit. Without being limited to any particular theory, it is thought that the rate of clearance of an exogenous fluorescent agent, such as MB-102, from the kidneys is expected to be a constant exponential decay characterized by the renal decay time constant RDTC.
In an aspect, a subset of the Flr signals corresponding to the post-agent administration period 1508/1510 may be selected to estimate an error for each combination of exponents used to calculate the IF signals using Eqn. (20) against a reference curve, including, but not limited to, a curve obtained using plasma measurements. By way of non-limiting example, if the exogenous fluorescent agent is introduced into the tissues of the patient by way of intravenous injection, the post-agent administration period includes the period after injection in which the exogenous fluorescent agent has undergone sufficient diffusion from the blood into the extracellular fluid space throughout the patient so that the decay of the fluorescence is representative of clearance of the agent by the kidneys. In various aspects, the post-agent administration period 1508/1510 of the Flr measurements may be selected by any suitable method without limitation. Non-limiting examples of suitable methods for identifying a post-agent administration period include: selection via inspection by a user and an automated selection method such as the equilibration detection method enabled by the equilibrium selection subunit 1308 as described in detail herein below.
FIG. 15 is a graph of fluorescence measurements obtained from a patient over a period of about 10 hours after injection of an exogenous fluorescence agent (MB-102) after a pre-injection period of about 3 hours. Referring to FIG. 15, the pre-injection/baseline period 1502 is characterized by a relatively low and stable fluorescence level, likely due the absence of endogenous fluorescent agent in the blood of the patient. After the injection 1503 of the exogenous fluorescence agent, the fluorescence measurements exhibit a sharp increase 1504 to a peak concentration 1506, followed by a relatively smooth exponential decrease 1508 back to background fluorescence levels as the kidneys eliminate the exogenous fluorescence agent from the blood of the patient. Without being limited to any particular theory, it is thought the injected exogenous fluorescence agent is likely equilibrated across the extra-cellular space once the decay of the fluorescence is well-described by a linear fit (or a line on semi-log plot). FIG. 16 is an enlargement of the graph of FIG. 15 showing a comparison of the measured fluorescence data to a linear curve fit 1604 to the log of the IF signal within a portion of the post-equilibrium period 1510, demonstrating the close fit of the single-exponential curve-fit to the IF signal data.
In an aspect, the log of the calculated IF signal value may be fit with a line and an error of the curve fit relative to the individual IF values may be compared to the IF signals calculated using Eqn. (20) for each of the plurality of combinations of exponents to calculate the error at 1410. Any statistical summary parameter suitable for quantifying the error of the single-exponent curve fit and the corresponding IF signal values may be used without limitation including, but not limited to: root mean square (RMS) error, average absolute deviation, mean signed deviation, mean squared deviation, and any other suitable statistical summary parameter. In one aspect, the calculated error at 1410 may be the normalized RMS error of the linear fit of the log(IF) signals. In this aspect, the normalized RMS error calculated at 1410 is a single numerical quantity to facilitate the subsequent selection of a single combination of exponents from the plurality of combinations identified at 1406.
Referring again to FIG. 14, the method 1400 includes selecting a single combination of exponents at 1412 from among the plurality of combinations for which IF was calculated at 1408. Without being limited to any particular theory, it is assumed that the combination of exponents associated with a calculated IF signal that minimizes the error calculated at 1410 is best suited for correcting the measured Flr signals to remove the effects of variation in the optical properties of the patient's skin during data acquisition within the post-agent administration period 1508/1510. In various aspects, any known method of identifying the combination of exponents may be used without limitation including, but not limited to, selecting the single combinations of exponents from a map of all error values corresponding to all combinations of exponents.
In various aspects, the plurality of error values corresponding to the plurality of combinations of exponents may be transformed into an error map comprising a three-dimensional volume in which each of the three dimensions corresponds to the powers used in Eqn. (20): kex, kem, and kem,filtered, respectively. In these various aspects, each error value corresponding to one of the combinations of exponents is mapped to a coordinate (kex1, kem1, and kem,filtered1) within the three-dimensional volume, where kex1, kem1, and kem,filtered1 are the numerical values for one combination of exponents. In various aspects, each error values may be mapped to the three-dimensional volume in any known format including, but not limited to: a number, a color, a greyscale value, and any other suitable format.
In an aspect, the three-dimensional map of error values described above may be transformed into a plurality of error surfaces corresponding to a planar map of the error values associated with a single value of one of the powers kex, kem, and kem,filtered, with the full numerical range of the remaining two exponents acting as a horizontal axis and a vertical axis of the error map.
FIG. 17 is an error map of the normalized RMS errors of the single-exponential curve-fits of the calculated IF signals maps to the full ranges of kem,filtered (horizontal axis) and kex (vertical axis) at a constant value of kem in which the normalized RMS errors are represented as colors on the error map. In one aspect, the normalized RMS value calculated for each coefficient may be normalized according to Eqn. (21):
RMSE CV = [ IF agent - fit ( IF agent ) 2 fit ( IF agent ) ] Eqn . ( 21 )
in which IFagent is the calculated IF signal, and fit(IFagent) is the corresponding value of the single-coefficient curve fit equation. In one aspect, the global error map method of determining the powers to be used in the correction for variation in skin optical properties by analyzing a single measurement set as described herein above. In another aspect, the global error map method may analyze and combine multiple measurement datasets for multiple individuals obtained using the same system and/or sensor head. In yet another aspect, the global error map method may analyze multiple measurement datasets from multiple individuals obtained using multiple systems and sensor heads. In an aspect, the powers to be used in the correction according to Eqn. (20) may be determined for each measurement of each individual. In other aspects, the powers to be used may be obtained using at least several different measurement datasets and the powers so obtained may be stored for subsequent use for measurement datasets obtained from a new individual and or obtained using a different system and/or sensor. In various aspects, the projection across each of the error surfaces (a kem,filtered-kex projection, a kem,filtered-kem projection, and a kem-kex projection) may be inspected to determine whether the power ranges defined at 1402 were adequate. In one aspect, the error surface may be inspected to confirm that the map includes a clearly defined minimum value. In this one aspect, if the inspection of the error map does not identify a minimum value, the ranges of one or more power vales may be revised and the method 1400 may be repeated. In one aspect, an assessment of the optical properties of the skin of the patient (e.g. melanin absorbance, blood content, and/or scattering coefficient) may be used to categorize the patient so that an appropriate set of coefficients may be selected for that category.
In an aspect, the combination of exponents kex, kem, and kem,filtered may be stored and used for subsequent measurements conducted by the system 200. FIG. 18 is a graph comparing the raw fluorescence signal (blue line) to the calculated IF signal (red line) for a measurement data set. In an additional aspect, a global correction may be calculated by combining measurements obtained using a plurality of different systems and/or sensor heads and identifying the combination of exponents corresponding to an overall minimum error value.
Linear Regression Method
In one aspect, the values of the power coefficients used in Eqn. (20) above are determined empirically using a linear regression method. A flow chart illustrating the various steps of the linear regression method of obtaining a correction in the form of a regression equation with predictor variables (DRex,DRem,DRem,filtered) is provided in FIG. 19,
Referring to FIG. 19, the method 1900 may include log transforming Flr to log (Fir) to prepare the raw fluorescence measurements Flr for analysis at 1902. FIG. 20 is a graph of log (Fir) produced at 1902. Referring again to FIG. 19, the method 1900 may further include selecting a region of stable optical properties 2002 (see FIG. 20) in an aspect, In this aspect, regions of stable optical properties 2002 typically correspond to linear segments on the graph of log (Fir) as shown in FIG. 20. In this aspect, the method 1900 further includes obtaining a linear regression model 2004 within the region of stable optical properties 2002 at 1906. The linear regression model 2004 may be obtained using any regression method without limitation including, but not limited to, a multi-variable linear regression modeling method.
Referring again to FIG. 19, the method 1900 may further include extending the linear regression model 2004 obtained within the region of stable optical properties 2002 to produce an extended linear regression 2008 extending into a region of variable optical properties 2010 at 1908. In an aspect, the region of variable optical properties 2010 is characterized by a non-linear profile within the graph of log (Fir) as illustrated in FIG. 20.
Referring again to FIG. 19, the method 1900 may further include obtaining a linear regression model 2004 with predictor variables Flr, DRex, DRem, and DRem,filtered at 1910 and the linear curve fit 2004 as the predicted response. The extension of the linear regression 2008 produced at 1908 may be used to train the linear regression model obtained at 1910.
The linear regression model may be developed using a measurement data set obtained from a single individual and/or a single system and sensor head in one aspect. In another aspect, the linear regression model may be developed using multiple measurement datasets obtained from multiple individuals and/or multiple systems and sensor heads. In some aspects, a linear regression model may be developed de novo for each new measurement data set obtained for an individual. In at least some other aspects, the constants and parameters characterizing a linear regression model developed as described herein above may be stored for subsequent use in lieu of developing a linear regression model de novo for each measurement data set obtained as described herein above.
d) Fault Detection Subunit
Referring again to FIG. 13, the processing unit 236 of the controller 212 may further include a fault detection subunit 1312 configured to monitor the function of the light sources 218/220 and light detectors 222/224 and to inform the user of any irregularities of any detected faults within the system 200 via the display unit 216. In various aspects, the fault detection subunit 1312 may enable the basic identification of fault and notice states by examining the signal levels received from the light sources 218/220 and light detectors 222/224 and associated additional temperature sensors 228 and additional light detectors 226 of the sensor head 204 (see FIG. 2). In various aspects, the signal magnitudes (see Eqn. (1)) and average signals may be used to determine the peak and nadir levels of the modulation of the LED light sources 218/220. The nadir of the signal, defined herein as the average signal minus half the peak-to-peak signal, may be used to monitor ambient light levels in one aspect. Without being limited to any particular theory, additional contributions to the nadir levels of the modulated signals, such as amplifier DC offset, may be neglected as small and constant relative to the contributions of ambient light leakage. In an aspect, if the detected ambient light levels register in excess of about one quarter of the high-speed ADC 1102 range at low detector amplifier gain, an ambient light notice is issued to the user via the display unit 216.
In various other aspects, saturation of the light detectors 222/224 detectors may also be monitored by the fault detection subunit 1312. In these other aspects, the saturation may be monitored by calculating the peak value of the signal, defined herein as the average signal value plus half the peak-to-peak signal. If the signal's peak value falls within is within 5% of saturation of the ADC range, the fault detection subunit 1312 may issue a saturation notice to the user via the display unit 216. If saturation event is detected by the fault detection subunit 1312, the ambient light level may then be checked to determine if the saturation event is associated with ambient light saturation, defined herein as a saturation event occurring concurrently with an ambient light notice as described herein above. If an ambient light saturation event is detected, the fault detection subunit 1312 issues an ambient light saturation notice to the user via the display unit 216, and data acquisition by the acquisition unit 234 is continued in this notice state to allow the user to resolve the condition. If a saturation event is detected that is not associated with an excess of ambient light, the fault detection unit may signal the light detector control unit 232 to perform an adjustment of detector gain and/or may signal the light source control unit 230 to perform an adjustment to the LED current source 1126 to adjust LED intensity. In various aspects, the fault detection unit issues a notification to the user via the display unit to report either the ambient light saturation event, or the saturation event not associated with an excess of ambient light. In some aspects, if a saturation event is detected, but the automatic gain adjustment has been disabled by a user when the system 200 is configured in the Engineering Mode as described herein above, the user is also notified via the display unit.
e) Post-Agent Administration Selection Subunit
Referring again to FIG. 13, the processing unit 236 may further include a post-agent administration selection subunit 1308 configured to automatically identify the portion of the measurement data set that corresponds to the post-agent administration period 1508/1510 (see FIG. 15). Referring against to FIG. 15, as described herein above, after an exogenous fluorescent agent, such as MB-102, is injected into the bloodstream of a patient, the exogenous fluorescent agent undergoes an equilibration period of diffusion from the bloodstream into the rest of the extracellular tissues of the patient. After the agent injection 1503, the temporal profile of the fluorescence signal Flr may be characterized as a two-exponential signal profile described by Eqn. (22):
IF pre-equilibration =C 0 +C 1 e −t/τ 1 +C 2 e −t/τ 2   Eqn. (22)
in which C0 is the baseline signal that is typically removed by baseline subtraction as described herein above.
Referring again to FIG. 15, once the diffusion of the exogenous fluorescent agent into the extracellular tissues of the patient reaches a quasi-steady state condition, post-equilibration period 1510 is achieved and the fluorescence signal may be characterized as a linear decay. Without being limited to any particular theory, the post-equilibration region of the measurement data set is assumed to be characterized as a region of the IF temporal profile that, when log-transformed, is well-described by a linear equation. In one aspect, the post-equilibration region is well-described described by Eqn. (23):
IF post-equilibration =C 0 +C 1 e −t/τ  Eqn. (23)
In an aspect, the post-agent administration selection subunit 1308 may identify the post-agent administration period 1510 automatically by performing a single-exponent curve fit at different portions of the IF data set and analyzing the associated curve fitting errors for each of the different portions. In various aspects, the post-agent administration selection subunit 1308 may select the earliest-occurring portion of the IF data set in which the curve-fit error associated with a single-exponent curve fit falls below a threshold value as the initial post-agent administration portion of the IF data set suitable for data correction and analysis as described herein above. Any analysis method suitable for comparing curve-fit errors association with single-exponential curve fits of different portions of the IF data set may be used in the post-agent administration selection subunit 1308 including, but not limited to, linear curve-fitting portions of the IF data set falling within overlapping or non-overlapping data windows and comparing the curve-fit errors of the corresponding data windows. In an aspect, the post-agent administration selection subunit 1308 may produce at least one signal configured to signal the time range within the IF data set corresponding to the post-agent administration period 1508/1510 to the diffuse reflectance correction subunit 1306 and/or RDTC calculation subunit 1310 to enable the selection of a suitable portion of the IF data set to correct and analyze as disclosed herein.
In another aspect, a linear fit and a 2-exponential fits to the IF data may be compared. In this other aspect, equilibration may be identified as complete once the fitting error is equivalent (corrected for the extra degrees of freedom in the 2-exponential fit).
f) RDTC Calculation Subunit
In various aspects, the system 200 is configured to transform the various measurements from the light detectors 222/224 and associated light sources 218/220 and other thermal and light sensors into a corrected intrinsic fluorescent (IF) signal corresponding to the detected fluorescence attributable solely to emission of fluorescence by the exogenous fluorescent agent at the emission wavelength in response to illumination by light at the excitatory wavelength. In various aspects, the exponential decrease of the IF signals during the post-agent administration portion of the IF data set may be analyzed to monitor and quantify renal function.
In one aspect, the exponential decrease of the IF signals during the post-agent administration portion of the IF data set may be transformed into a glomerular filtration rate (GFR) configured to quantify renal function. In another aspect, the exponential decrease of the IF signals during the post-equilibration portion of the IF data set may be transformed into a renal decay time constant (RDTC), also configured to quantify renal function. In another aspect, the exponential decrease of the IF signals during the post-equilibration portion of the IF data set may be transformed into a renal decay rate, also configured to quantify renal function.
Referring again to FIG. 13, the processing unit 236 may further include an RDTC calculation subunit 1310 configured to automatically transform the IF signals into a renal decay time constant (RDTC). As used herein, renal decay time constant (RDTC) is defined as the time constant associated with the post-equilibration single-exponential decay described in Eqn. (23) herein above. In one aspect, after accurate baseline subtraction by the baseline subtraction subunit 1304, the renal decay time constant τ may be calculated by performing a linear regression on the log-transformed IF signal data (log (IF)), as described in Eqn. (24):
log ( IF ) = log ( C 1 ) - 1 τ t Eqn . ( 24 )
In various aspects the RDTC calculation subunit 1310 may produce signals configured to produce a display of the calculated RDTC using the display unit 216. The display of the calculated RDTC may be provided to the display unit 216 in any suitable format including, but not limited to: a graph of RDTC as a function of time, a single discrete RDTC value, a table of RDTC values as a function of time, a color-coded display or other graphical representation configured to specific whether the calculated RDTC may be classified as normal/healthy, abnormal, high, low, and any other suitable classification. In various other aspects, any of the graphical formats described above may be continuously or non-continuously updates as additional data is obtained and analyzed. In one aspect, the RDTC calculation subunit 1310 may calculate RDTC as described herein above within non-overlapping and/or overlapping windows within the IF data set.
In another aspect, the RDTC calculation subunit 1310 may convert RDTC into glomerular filtration rate (GFR) using known methods. In this aspect, RDTC may be inverted and multiplied by a slope, resulting in cGFR, a prediction of GFR that may be corrected for body size (e.g. body surface area, or volume of distribution).
v) Memory
Referring again to FIG. 2, the controller 212 of the system 200 may further include a memory 242 configured to facilitate data storage in the system 200. In some embodiments, the memory 242 includes a plurality of storage components such as, but not limited to, a hard disk drive, flash memory, random access memory, and a magnetic or optical disk. Alternatively or additionally, the memory 242 may include remote storage such a server in communication with the controller 212. The memory 242 stores at least one computer program that, when received by the at least one processor, cause the at least one processor to perform any of the functions of the controller 212 described above. In one implementation, the memory 242 may be or contain a computer-readable medium, such as a floppy disk device, a hard disk device, an optical disk device, or a tape device, a flash memory or other similar solid state memory device, or an array of devices, including devices in a storage area network or other configurations. A computer program product can be tangibly embodied in an information carrier. The computer program product may also contain instructions that, when executed, perform one or more functions, such as those described herein. The information carrier may be a non-transitory computer- or machine-readable medium, such as the memory 242 or memory on the processor 238.
In various aspects, the system 200 may record raw measurements and processed data to a series of files. Each file may contain a header, which contains information about the operator, instrument, and session. Each experimental session records a set of files into a separate folder for each sensor head used in that session. The raw data file may contains in-phase, quadrature, and average measurements from the detectors and monitors during the active periods of both the excitation wavelength and the emission wavelength LEDs, along with the gain settings of the LEDs and detectors at the time of data acquisition.
In various other aspects, the processed data file may contain the fluorescence and diffuse reflectance measurements after magnitude calculation and correction for the monitor readings, along with the gain settings of the LEDs and detectors. The intrinsic fluorescence data file may contain the intrinsic fluorescence measurements resulting from the diffuse reflectance correction of the raw fluorescence signals. The GFR file may contain the calculated GFR as a function of time, classified to indicate whether post-equilibration has occurred, along with confidence bounds. The telemetry file may contain the temperature and voltage measurements. The event record file may contain both user and automatically generated event records.
vi) GUI Unit
Referring again to FIG. 2, the controller 212 may include a GUI unit 240 configured to receive a plurality of signals encoding various measured and transformed data from other units of the system in various aspects. In addition, the GUI unit may be configured to produce signals configured to operate the display unit 216 in order to display data, frames, forms, and/or any other communications of information between the user and the system 200.
vii) Processor
Referring again to FIG. 2, the controller 212 may further include a processor 238. The processor 238 may include any type of conventional processor, microprocessor, or processing logic that interprets and executes instructions. The processor 238 may be configured to process instructions for execution within the controller 212, including instructions stored in the memory 242 to display graphical information for a GUI on an external input/output device, such as display unit 216 coupled to a high speed interface. In other implementations, multiple processors and/or multiple buses may be used, as appropriate, along with multiple memories and types of memory. Also, multiple controllers 212 may be connected, with each device providing portions of the necessary operations to enable the functions of the system 200. In some embodiments, the processor 238 may include the acquisition unit 234, the light detector control unit 232, the light source control unit 230, and/or the processing unit 236.
As used herein, a processor such as the processor 238 may include any programmable system including systems using micro-controllers, reduced instruction set circuits (RISC), application specific integrated circuits (ASICs), logic circuits, and any other circuit or processor capable of executing the functions described herein. The above examples are example only, and are thus not intended to limit in any way the definition and/or meaning of the term “processor.”
As described herein, computing devices and computer systems include a processor and a memory. However, any processor in a computer device referred to herein may also refer to one or more processors wherein the processor may be in one computing device or a plurality of computing devices acting in parallel. Additionally, any memory in a computer device referred to herein may also refer to one or more memories wherein the memories may be in one computing device or a plurality of computing devices acting in parallel.
C. Operation Unit
The operation unit 214 may be configured to enable a user to interface (e.g., visual, audio, touch, button presses, stylus taps, etc.) with the controller 212 to control the operation of the system 200. In some embodiments, the operation unit 214 may be further coupled to each sensor head 204 to control the operation of each sensor head 204.
D. Display Unit
Referring again to FIG. 2, the system 200 may further include a display unit 216 configured to enable a user to view data and control information of the system 200. The display unit 216 may further be coupled to other components of the system 200 such as the sensor head 204. The display unit 216 may include a visual display such as a cathode ray tube (CRT) display, liquid crystal display (LCD), light emitting diode (LED) display, or “electronic ink” display. In some embodiments, the display unit 216 may be configured to present a graphical user interface (e.g., a web browser and/or a client application) to the user. A graphical user interface may include, for example, an display for GFR values as described herein above as produced by the system 200, and operational data of the system 200
Exogenous Markers
Without being limited to any particular theory, molecules which are highly hydrophilic and small (creatinine, molecular weight=113) to moderately sized (inulin, molecular weight ˜5500) are known to be rapidly cleared from systemic circulation by glomerular filtration. In addition to these properties, an ideal GFR agent would not be reabsorbed nor secreted by the renal tubule, would exhibit negligible binding to plasma proteins, and would have very low toxicity. In order to design optical probes that satisfy all of these requirements a balance was struck between photophysical properties, and the molecular size and hydrophilicity of the fluorophore. For example, while hydrophobic cyanine and indocyanine dyes absorb and emit optimally within the near infrared (NIR) biological window (700-900 nm), hydrophilicity is not sufficiently high to function as pure GFR agents. Smaller dye molecules may be more easily converted to the extremely hydrophilic species required for renal clearance, but the limited 7C-systems resulting from these lower molecular weight compounds generally enable one photon excitation and emission in the ultraviolet (UV).
To resolve the pharmacokinetic issues in concert with enhancing the photophysical properties, simple derivatives of 2,5-diaminopyrazine-3,6-dicarboxylic acid act as very low molecular weight fluorescent scaffold systems with bright emission in the yellow-to-red region of the electromagnetic spectrum. SAR studies have been carried out using amide-linked variants of these derivatives for the simultaneous optimization of GFR pharmacokinetics and photophysical properties. A variety of hydrophilic functionalities for enabling rapid renal clearance of this class of pyrazine fluorophores including carbohydrate, alcohol, amino acid and various PEG-based linker strategies may be employed. PEG substitution maybe used to increase hydrophilicity and solubility, reduce toxicity, and modulate aggregation of the resulting pyrazine derivatives. Variations of molecular weight and architecture (and hence hydrodynamic volume) in a series of moderately sized PEG-pyrazine derivatives may also be suitable for use as endogenous fluorescent agents.
In one aspect, the exogenous fluorescent agent is MB-102.
Examples
The following example illustrates various aspects of the disclosed systems and methods.
Example 1: Perturbation Analysis
To demonstrate the effectiveness of the diffuse reflectance data correction method described herein above, the following experiments were conducted.
A system similar to the system 200 described herein above was used to monitor the fluorescence produced during the renal elimination of an exogenous fluorescent agent, MB-102, using the methods described herein above, in particular the diffuse reflectance data correction method.
FIG. 21A is a graph summarizing the changes in the magnitude of the raw fluorescence signal (Flr) just prior to injection of the MB-102 fluorescent agent into a pig and for about six hours post-injection. During the post-equilibration portion, corresponding to a time of about 13:45 in FIG. 21A, the pig was subjected to a series of perturbations selected to vary the optical properties of the pig's skin and/or underlying tissues: administration of blood pressure medications to induce vasodilation/vasorestriction 2102, application of pressure to compress the tissue 2104, lateral movement of the sensor head 2106, SpO2 decrease 2108, SpO2 decrease 2110, remove/replace sensor head 2112/2114, and skin cooling 2116.
FIG. 21B is a graph summarizing the corrected intrinsic fluorescence signal (IF) corrected as described herein above with no baseline subtraction. At time points later than 2 hours after agent injection, the time course of the IF signal was characterized by the expected single-exponential decay of the signal, with attenuated variation due to the applied perturbations.
Table 4 summarizes the specific effects of the diffuse reflectance data correction method on the Flr data associated with each individual perturbation:
TABLE 4
Effect of Diffuse Reflectance Data Correction
PERTURBATION EFFECT OF CORRECTION
Pressure Application Decreased data excursions/outliers
Lateral Sensor Movement Decreased data excursions/outliers
SpO2 Decrease Slope of IF signal decrease improved
SpO2 Increase Slope of IF signal decrease improved
Remove/Replace Sensor Head Decreased data excursions/outliers
Cooling No noticeable impact
FIG. 21C is a graph summarizing the detected diffuse reflectance signals DRem,filtered, DRem, and DRex substituted into Eqn. (20) to determine the diffuse reflectance correction of the raw Flr signal as described herein above. As illustrated in FIG. 21C, the DRem, filtered signal was the most sensitive to the various perturbations. The DRem, and DRex signals exhibited modest variation in response to the perturbations.
The results of these experiments demonstrated that the diffuse reflectance data correction was capable of correcting the raw fluorescent signal data to compensate for the effects of a variety of perturbations that induced a variety of changes in the skin's optical properties.
Example 2: Sensor Head with Flared Housing
FIG. 23 is a perspective view of a sensor head 204 a in another aspect. In this other aspect, the sensor head 204 a includes a housing 600 a formed from an upper housing 602 a and a flared lower housing 604 a. The surface area of the lower housing 604 a expands to form an enlarged bottom surface 608 a. The housing 600 a further includes a cable opening 806 a formed through the upper housing 602 a.
FIG. 24 is a bottom view of the sensor head 204 a showing the bottom surface 608 a of the housing 600 a. The bottom surface 608 a may include an aperture plate 702 a including one or more apertures 704 a configured to transmit light between the skin of the patient and the light sources and light detectors contained inside the housing 600. As illustrated in FIG. 24, the apertures 704 a include a light delivery aperture 1002 a configured to deliver illumination produced by the first and second light sources 218/220 to tissues of the patient 202, as well as first and second detector apertures 1004/1006 configured to receive light from the tissues of the patient 202. In one aspect, the bottom surface 608 a enables the positioning of the apertures 704 a beneath a relatively large area obscured from ambient light conditions by the bottom surface 608 a. This reduction of scattered ambient light entering the first and second detector apertures 1004/1006 reduces noise introduced into the light intensity measurements obtained by the first and second light detectors 222/224.
In various aspects, the bottom surface 608 a of the housing 600 a may be attached the patient's skin using a biocompatible and transparent adhesive material 610 a including, but not limited to, a clear double-sided medical grade adhesive, as illustrated in FIG. 24. The transparent adhesive material 610 a may be positioned on the bottom surface 608 a such that the adhesive material 610 a covers the apertures 704 a.
FIG. 25 is an isometric view of the sensor head 204 a with the upper housing 602 a and various electrical components removed to expose an inner housing 2502. FIG. 26 is an exploded view of the inner housing 2502 and associated electrical components illustrated in FIG. 25. Referring to FIG. 25 and FIG. 26, the inner housing 2502 is contained within the housing 600 a and is mounted to the lower housing 608 a. The inner housing 2502 contains a sensor mount 912 with a first detection well 908, a second detection well 910, and a light source well 902 formed therethrough. The first light detector 222 is mounted within the first detection well 908 and the second light detector 224 is mounted within the second detection well 910. The first and second light sources 218/220 are mounted within the light source well 902. In an aspect, the first detection well 908, second detection well 910, and light source well 902 of the sensor mount 912 are optically isolated from one another to ensure that light from the light sources 218/220 does not reach the light detectors 222/224 without coupling through the skin of the patient 202. The separation between the two detection wells 908/910 ensures that the detected fluorescence signal from the exogenous fluorescent agent is distinguishable from the unfiltered excitation light, as described in detail above.
Referring to FIG. 26, the inner housing 2502 includes a first detection aperture 2602, second detection aperture 2604, and light source aperture 2606. The sensor mount 912 is coupled to the inner housing 2502 so that the first detection aperture 2602, second detection aperture 2604, and light source aperture 2606 are aligned with the first detection well 908, second detection well 910, and light source well 902 of the sensor mount 912, respectively.
In one aspect, optically transparent windows 2610, 2612, and 2614 are coupled within first detection aperture 2602, second detection aperture 2604, and light source aperture 2606, respectively, to seal the apertures while also providing optically transparent conduits between the tissues and the interior of the sensor head 204 a. In addition, diffusers 2616, 2618, and 2620 are coupled over optically transparent windows 2610, 2612, and 2614, respectively. The diffusers 2616, 2618, and 2620 are provided to spatially homogenize light delivered to the tissues by light sources 218/220 and to spatially homogenize light detected by light detectors 222/224. In an aspect, the absorption filter 244 is coupled to the diffuser 2616. In one aspect, an optically transparent adhesive is used to couple the absorption filter 244 is coupled to the diffuser 2616.
In view of the above, it will be seen that the several advantages of the disclosure are achieved and other advantageous results attained. As various changes could be made in the above methods and systems without departing from the scope of the disclosure, it is intended that all matter contained in the above description and shown in the accompanying drawings shall be interpreted as illustrative and not in a limiting sense.
When introducing elements of the present disclosure or the various versions, embodiment(s) or aspects thereof, the articles “a”, “an”, “the” and “said” are intended to mean that there are one or more of the elements. The terms “comprising”, “including” and “having” are intended to be inclusive and mean that there may be additional elements other than the listed elements.

Claims (20)

What is claimed is:
1. A method of assessment of renal function by monitoring a time-varying fluorescence signal emitted from a fluorescent agent from within a diffuse reflecting medium with time-varying optical properties, the method comprising:
using a renal monitoring system comprising at least one light source, at least one light detector, at least one optical filter, and at least one controller to provide a measurement data set comprising a plurality of measurement entries, each measurement data entry comprising at least two measurements obtained at one data acquisition time from a patient before and after administration of the fluorescent agent, the at least two measurements selected from:
a DRex signal detected at a second region adjacent to the diffuse reflecting medium by an unfiltered light detector during illumination of the diffuse reflecting medium by excitatory-wavelength light from a first region adjacent to the diffuse reflecting medium;
an Fir signal detected at a third region adjacent to the diffuse reflecting medium by a filtered light detector during illumination of the diffuse reflecting medium by excitatory-wavelength light from the first region;
a DRem signal detected at the second region by the unfiltered light detector during illumination of the diffuse reflecting medium by emission-wavelength light from the first region; and
a DRem,filtered signal detected at the third region by the filtered light detector during illumination of the diffuse reflecting medium by emission-wavelength light from the first region,
identifying a post-agent administration portion of the measurement data set; and
transforming each Fir signal of each measurement data entry within the post-agent administration portion of the measurement data set to an IF signal representing a detected fluorescence intensity emitted solely by the fluorescent agent from within the diffuse reflecting medium, wherein transforming comprises combining the at least two measurements according to a transformation relation comprising a mathematical equation converting Fir to IF,
wherein the at least two measurements comprise the Fir signal and the DRem,filtered signal, and
wherein rate of the decrease in intensity of the IF signal is representative of clearance of the fluorescent agent by kidneys.
2. The method of claim 1, wherein the transformation relation consists of Eqn. (20):
IF = Flr DR ex , meas k ex , meas DR em k em DR em , filtered k em , filtered ; Eqn . ( 20 )
wherein IF represents a fluorescence intensity emitted solely by the fluorescent agent, and kex,meas, kem, and kem,filtered are exponents of terms DRex, DRem, and DRem,filtered, respectively.
3. The method of claim 2, wherein kex,meas, kem, and kem,filtered are previously determined from a prior analysis of a prior measurement data set.
4. The method of claim 2, wherein kex,meas,kem, and kem,filtered are determined by a global error map method comprising:
forming three vectors of proposed exponent values, each of three vectors comprising a plurality of proposed values for kex,meas, kem, and kem,filtered, respectively,
transforming each Flr signal of each measurement data entry within the post-agent administration portion of the measurement data according to the transformation relation using each combination of proposed values from the three vectors to form a plurality of transformed data measurement sets;
performing a single-exponential curve fit over at least a portion of the measurement data entries for each of the plurality of the transformed data measurement sets to obtain a plurality of curve-fit errors, each curve-fit error corresponding to one combination of the proposed exponent values from the three vectors;
assembling an error map comprising at least a portion of the plurality of curve-fit errors mapped to a volume defined by two or more orthogonal axes, each orthogonal axis comprising a range of proposed exponent values from one of the three vectors;
identifying a minimum curve-fit error within the error map; and
selecting the proposed exponent values corresponding to the minimum curve-fit error for use in Eqn. (20).
5. The method of claim 4, wherein each of the plurality of curve-fit errors consists of a normalized root-mean-square fitting error of the single-exponential curve-fit.
6. The method of claim 1, wherein the transformation relation consists of a linear regression model formed with predictor variables DRex, DRem, and DRem,filtered using a low-variability portion of the plurality of measurement data entries characterized by a curve-fit error falling below a threshold value for a single-exponential curve-fit of the measurement data entries of the low variability portion.
7. The method of claim 6, wherein the linear regression model is extrapolated to measurement data entries outside of the low variability region.
8. The method of claim 1, further comprising subtracting a baseline value for Flr from each of the Fir values from the plurality of the measurement data sets prior to transforming each Flr signal of each measurement data entry within the post-agent administration portion of the measurement data set to an IF signal.
9. The method of claim 2, wherein any one or more of kex,meas, kem, and kem,filtered is equal to 0.
10. The method of claim 1, wherein the excitatory-wavelength light and the emission-wavelength light are selected to coincide with a deoxyhemoglobin isosbestic point and an oxyhemoglobin isosbestic point, wherein each isosbestic point has a wavelength characterized by about equal light absorbance by deoxyhemoglobin and oxyhemoglobin.
11. The method of claim 1, wherein (i) the nominal separation distance between the second region and the first region and (ii) the nominal separation distance between the third region and the first region are each selected to balance the competing effects of logarithmic drop-off of signal associated with separation distance and reduced size of the background signal relative to the signal from the fluorescent agent.
12. The method of claim 11, wherein the nominal separation distance is from about 1 mm to about 8 mm.
13. The method of claim 1, wherein the renal monitoring system further comprises a light source control unit configured to automatically modulate the intensity of light produced by the at least one light source.
14. The method of claim 13, wherein the intensity of the at least one light source is set by the light source control unit in coordination with a detector gain of the light detectors.
15. The method of claim 1, wherein the renal monitoring system comprises at least two light sources, and wherein the at least one controller further comprises a processing unit, wherein said processing unit comprises a pre-processing unit, and wherein said pre-processing unit comprises a light directionality correction module, said light directionality correction module configured to enable a correction to variations in the directionality of the at least two light sources, as measured by the detected signals.
16. The method of claim 1, wherein the at least one controller further comprises a processing unit, wherein said processing unit comprises a pre-processing subunit, and wherein said pre-processing subunit comprises a tissue heterogeneity correction module, said tissue heterogeneity correction module configured to enable a correction to variations in the detected signals associated with heterogeneity of the tissues intervening between the first region and the second and third regions.
17. The method of claim 1, wherein the at least one controller further comprises a processing unit, wherein said processing unit comprises a pre-processing subunit, and wherein said pre-processing subunit comprises a filter throughput temperature correction and signal decomposition module, said filter throughput temperature correction and signal decomposition module configured to enable a correction to variations in the detected signals associated with temperature-dependent optical properties of an optical filter associated with the second light detector during excitation-wavelength illumination.
18. The method of claim 1, wherein the at least one controller further comprises a processing unit, wherein said processing unit comprises a pre-processing subunit, and wherein said pre-processing subunit comprises an excitation light leakthrough subtraction module configured to perform an excitation leakthrough subtraction on the measured Flr signal.
19. The method of claim 1, wherein the at least one controller further comprises a processing unit, wherein said processing unit comprises a post-agent administration selection subunit, said post-agent administration selection subunit configured to automatically identify the portion of the measurement data set that corresponds to the period after administration of the fluorescent agent and after equilibration of the fluorescent agent in the extracellular tissues of the patient.
20. The method of claim 1, wherein the at least one controller further comprises a processing unit, wherein said processing unit comprises a pre-processing subunit, and wherein said pre-processing subunit comprises a Flr signal subtraction module configured to perform a Flr signal subtraction on the measured DRex signal.
US16/717,436 2017-01-30 2019-12-17 Method for non-invasive monitoring of fluorescent tracer agent with diffuse reflection corrections Active US10980459B2 (en)

Priority Applications (5)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US16/717,436 US10980459B2 (en) 2017-01-30 2019-12-17 Method for non-invasive monitoring of fluorescent tracer agent with diffuse reflection corrections
US17/000,820 US10952656B2 (en) 2017-01-30 2020-08-24 Sensor head for non-invasive monitoring of a fluorescent tracer agent
US17/200,381 US11478172B2 (en) 2017-01-30 2021-03-12 Method for non-invasive monitoring of fluorescent tracer agent with diffuse reflecting medium with time-varying optical properties
US17/932,713 US11950907B2 (en) 2017-01-30 2022-09-16 Method for non-invasive monitoring of fluorescent tracer agent with diffuse reflecting medium with time-varying optical properties
US18/583,363 US20240237928A1 (en) 2017-01-30 2024-02-21 Method for non-invasive monitoring of fluorescent tracer agent with diffuse reflecting medium with time-varying optical properties

Applications Claiming Priority (3)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US201762452025P 2017-01-30 2017-01-30
US15/884,365 US10548521B2 (en) 2017-01-30 2018-01-30 Method for non-invasive monitoring of fluorescent tracer agent with diffuse reflection corrections
US16/717,436 US10980459B2 (en) 2017-01-30 2019-12-17 Method for non-invasive monitoring of fluorescent tracer agent with diffuse reflection corrections

Related Parent Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US15/884,365 Continuation US10548521B2 (en) 2017-01-30 2018-01-30 Method for non-invasive monitoring of fluorescent tracer agent with diffuse reflection corrections

Related Child Applications (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US17/000,820 Continuation US10952656B2 (en) 2017-01-30 2020-08-24 Sensor head for non-invasive monitoring of a fluorescent tracer agent
US17/200,381 Continuation US11478172B2 (en) 2017-01-30 2021-03-12 Method for non-invasive monitoring of fluorescent tracer agent with diffuse reflecting medium with time-varying optical properties

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
US20200138352A1 US20200138352A1 (en) 2020-05-07
US10980459B2 true US10980459B2 (en) 2021-04-20

Family

ID=62977348

Family Applications (6)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US15/884,365 Active 2038-07-20 US10548521B2 (en) 2017-01-30 2018-01-30 Method for non-invasive monitoring of fluorescent tracer agent with diffuse reflection corrections
US16/717,436 Active US10980459B2 (en) 2017-01-30 2019-12-17 Method for non-invasive monitoring of fluorescent tracer agent with diffuse reflection corrections
US17/000,820 Active US10952656B2 (en) 2017-01-30 2020-08-24 Sensor head for non-invasive monitoring of a fluorescent tracer agent
US17/200,381 Active US11478172B2 (en) 2017-01-30 2021-03-12 Method for non-invasive monitoring of fluorescent tracer agent with diffuse reflecting medium with time-varying optical properties
US17/932,713 Active US11950907B2 (en) 2017-01-30 2022-09-16 Method for non-invasive monitoring of fluorescent tracer agent with diffuse reflecting medium with time-varying optical properties
US18/583,363 Pending US20240237928A1 (en) 2017-01-30 2024-02-21 Method for non-invasive monitoring of fluorescent tracer agent with diffuse reflecting medium with time-varying optical properties

Family Applications Before (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US15/884,365 Active 2038-07-20 US10548521B2 (en) 2017-01-30 2018-01-30 Method for non-invasive monitoring of fluorescent tracer agent with diffuse reflection corrections

Family Applications After (4)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US17/000,820 Active US10952656B2 (en) 2017-01-30 2020-08-24 Sensor head for non-invasive monitoring of a fluorescent tracer agent
US17/200,381 Active US11478172B2 (en) 2017-01-30 2021-03-12 Method for non-invasive monitoring of fluorescent tracer agent with diffuse reflecting medium with time-varying optical properties
US17/932,713 Active US11950907B2 (en) 2017-01-30 2022-09-16 Method for non-invasive monitoring of fluorescent tracer agent with diffuse reflecting medium with time-varying optical properties
US18/583,363 Pending US20240237928A1 (en) 2017-01-30 2024-02-21 Method for non-invasive monitoring of fluorescent tracer agent with diffuse reflecting medium with time-varying optical properties

Country Status (15)

Country Link
US (6) US10548521B2 (en)
EP (1) EP3573518A4 (en)
JP (2) JP6861288B2 (en)
KR (2) KR102306048B1 (en)
CN (3) CN110520035B (en)
AU (1) AU2018213422B2 (en)
BR (1) BR112019015520A2 (en)
CA (2) CA3051963A1 (en)
IL (2) IL300236B2 (en)
MX (2) MX2019009040A (en)
PH (1) PH12019501749A1 (en)
RU (1) RU2721652C1 (en)
SG (2) SG10202108183SA (en)
WO (1) WO2018140978A1 (en)
ZA (1) ZA201904973B (en)

Families Citing this family (22)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
KR102327738B1 (en) 2015-06-18 2021-11-17 삼성전기주식회사 Semiconductor package and method of manufacturing the same
KR20180052089A (en) * 2016-11-09 2018-05-17 가부시키가이샤 한도오따이 에네루기 켄큐쇼 Operation method of electronic device
RU2021133174A (en) 2017-10-27 2021-12-02 Медибикон Инк. COMPOSITIONS AND SYSTEMS FOR ASSESSING KIDNEY FUNCTION
EP3849400B1 (en) * 2018-09-11 2023-11-22 Koninklijke Philips N.V. Wavelength and bandwidth selection for diffuse reflective spectroscopy based gingivitis detection
US11513002B2 (en) 2018-12-12 2022-11-29 Hamamatsu Photonics K.K. Light detection device having temperature compensated gain in avalanche photodiode
US12113088B2 (en) 2018-12-12 2024-10-08 Hamamatsu Photonics K.K. Light detection device
WO2020121852A1 (en) 2018-12-12 2020-06-18 浜松ホトニクス株式会社 Photodetector
JP7454917B2 (en) 2018-12-12 2024-03-25 浜松ホトニクス株式会社 light detection device
WO2020121858A1 (en) 2018-12-12 2020-06-18 浜松ホトニクス株式会社 Photodetector and method for manufacturing photodetector
CA3125119A1 (en) * 2019-01-16 2020-07-23 Medibeacon Inc. Two piece sensor assembly and method of use
EP3922008A1 (en) 2019-02-04 2021-12-15 Copious Imaging LLC Advanced computational pixel imagers with multiple in-pixel counters
US20210278290A1 (en) * 2020-03-06 2021-09-09 Verily Life Sciences Llc Temperature sensor and fever alert generator with tunable parameters
WO2021178772A1 (en) 2020-03-06 2021-09-10 Verily Life Sciences Llc Core temperature estimation from skin and ambient temperature sensors using a dynamic model
US20210338090A1 (en) * 2020-05-01 2021-11-04 Viavi Solutions Inc. Optical sensor device
EP4185194A4 (en) * 2020-07-24 2024-07-24 Medibeacon Inc Systems and methods for home transdermal assessment of gastrointestinal function
KR20220046186A (en) * 2020-10-07 2022-04-14 삼성전자주식회사 Electronic device and method for measuring for skin autofluorescence in the electronic device
EP4019916A1 (en) * 2020-12-23 2022-06-29 OTT HydroMet B.V. Pyranometer
CN113476043B (en) * 2021-07-01 2024-09-24 深圳亿杉医疗科技有限公司 Non-invasive sensing device, detection method and detector
CN113720825B (en) * 2021-11-04 2022-02-08 四川丹诺迪科技有限公司 Optical instant detector and detection method and application
DE102022121505A1 (en) 2022-08-25 2024-03-07 Carl Zeiss Meditec Ag Method, computer program and data processing unit for preparing the observation of a fluorescence intensity, method for observing a fluorescence intensity and optical observation system
CN115728276B (en) * 2022-11-14 2024-01-23 中船重工安谱(湖北)仪器有限公司 Explosive detection method and detection system
TWI839056B (en) * 2022-12-29 2024-04-11 台亞半導體股份有限公司 A curved non-invasive glucose monitoring module

Citations (47)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5403928A (en) 1990-05-15 1995-04-04 Diatron Corporation Fluorescent marker components and fluorescent probes
US5584296A (en) 1992-12-01 1996-12-17 Somanetics Corporation Patient sensor for optical cerebral oximeters and the like
US5847395A (en) * 1996-10-23 1998-12-08 Siemens Medical Systems Adaptive baseline correction for gamma camera
US6619838B2 (en) 2001-08-22 2003-09-16 Scimed Life Systems, Inc. Two-piece sensor assembly
US20030215391A1 (en) 2001-07-19 2003-11-20 Carlos Rabito Fluorescent agents for real-time measurement of organ function
US20030236452A1 (en) 2002-06-20 2003-12-25 Richard Melker Novel non-invasive perfusion monitor and system, specially configured oximeter probes, methods of using same, and covers for probes
US20040022730A1 (en) 2000-05-11 2004-02-05 Heinz-Michael Hein Fluorescent isothiocyanate (fitc) sinistrin, its production and use
US6689616B1 (en) 1997-12-17 2004-02-10 Roche Diagnostics Gmbh Dye-polysaccharide conjugates and their use as a diagnostic agent
US20040065806A1 (en) 2000-11-22 2004-04-08 Donal Bradley Detection system
US6720572B1 (en) 1999-06-25 2004-04-13 The Penn State Research Foundation Organic light emitters with improved carrier injection
US20040197267A1 (en) 2003-02-19 2004-10-07 Black Robert D. In vivo fluorescence sensors, systems, and related methods operating in conjunction with fluorescent analytes
US20040210280A1 (en) 2002-10-25 2004-10-21 Bionics Pharma Gmbh Plaster-type chip systems for thermodynamic control of topical dermal and transdermal systems
US20050137459A1 (en) 2003-12-17 2005-06-23 Scimed Life Systems, Inc. Medical device with OLED illumination light source
US20060020216A1 (en) 2004-07-20 2006-01-26 Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha Medical information detection apparatus and health management system using the medical information detection apparatus
US20060095102A1 (en) 2003-09-17 2006-05-04 Thomas Perez Method and apparatus for sublingual application of light to blood
US7050175B1 (en) 2003-08-08 2006-05-23 Carl Zeiss Smt Ag Method for calibrating an interferometer apparatus, for qualifying an optical surface, and for manufacturing a substrate having an optical surface
US20060118742A1 (en) 2004-12-06 2006-06-08 Richard Levenson Systems and methods for in-vivo optical imaging and measurement
WO2006063246A1 (en) 2004-12-08 2006-06-15 The General Hospital Corporation System and method for normalized fluorescence or bioluminescence imaging
EP1707114A1 (en) 2005-03-30 2006-10-04 Lifescan, Inc. Fluorescence measurement analytical kit
EP1752085A2 (en) 2005-08-09 2007-02-14 Lifescan, Inc. Kinematic adhesive fluorescence measurement patch
US20070038046A1 (en) 2005-08-09 2007-02-15 Hayter Paul G Kinematic fluorescence measurement band
US20070218563A1 (en) 2004-09-21 2007-09-20 Roche Diagnostics Operations, Inc. Stiochiometrically defined dye-labelled substances for measuring glomerular filtration rate, the production thereof and their use
US20070237678A1 (en) 2004-10-07 2007-10-11 Bernd Roesicke Analytical Test Element With Wireless Data Transmission
US20080082004A1 (en) 2006-09-08 2008-04-03 Triage Wireless, Inc. Blood pressure monitor
US20080281173A1 (en) 2003-04-24 2008-11-13 The Board Of Regents Of The University Of Texas System Noninvasive blood analysis by optical probing of the veins under the tongue
US20080312539A1 (en) 2006-02-24 2008-12-18 Dorshow Richard B Methods of Using Optical Agents
WO2009005748A1 (en) 2007-06-29 2009-01-08 The Trustees Of Columbia University In The City Ofnew York Optical imaging or spectroscopy systems and methods
US20090066934A1 (en) 2005-07-14 2009-03-12 Johnway Gao Optical devices for biological and chemical detection
WO2010020673A2 (en) 2008-08-22 2010-02-25 Basf Se Transcutaneous organ function measurement
US20100240983A1 (en) 2009-03-19 2010-09-23 Youngkyoo Jung Multi-phase pseudo-continuous arterial spin labeling
US20110049384A1 (en) 2007-10-19 2011-03-03 Yared Wael I Imaging Systems Featuring Waveguiding Compensation
WO2011089258A2 (en) 2010-01-25 2011-07-28 Imec A variability-aware reliability simulation method of electronic systems
US8115000B2 (en) 2006-06-22 2012-02-14 Mallinckrodt Llc Pyrazine derivatives and uses thereof in renal monitoring
US20120128264A1 (en) 2010-11-23 2012-05-24 General Electric Company Methods and systems of optical imaging for target detection in a scattering medium
US20130006116A1 (en) * 2010-01-25 2013-01-03 University Health Network System and method for sub-surface fluorescence imaging
US20130109963A1 (en) 2011-10-31 2013-05-02 The University Of Connecticut Method and apparatus for medical imaging using combined near-infrared optical tomography, fluorescent tomography and ultrasound
US20130116512A1 (en) 2011-04-26 2013-05-09 Mir Imran Mouthpiece for measurement of biometric data of a diver and underwater communication
US8664392B2 (en) 2004-12-23 2014-03-04 Medibeacon, LLC Pyrazine derivatives for bioconjugation
US8697033B2 (en) 2008-12-17 2014-04-15 Medibeacon, LLC Modified pyrazine derivatives and uses thereof
WO2014062716A1 (en) 2012-10-15 2014-04-24 Visen Medical, Inc. Systems, methods, and apparatus for imaging of diffuse media featuring cross-modality weighting of fluorescent and bioluminescent sources
US20140121539A1 (en) 2012-10-29 2014-05-01 Microsoft Corporation Wearable personal information system
US8778309B2 (en) 2004-12-23 2014-07-15 Medibeacon Llc Fluorescent pyrazine derivatives and methods of using the same in assessing renal function
US20140249853A1 (en) 2013-03-04 2014-09-04 Hello Inc. Monitoring System and Device with Sensors and User Profiles Based on Biometric User Information
US20150306486A1 (en) 2010-12-30 2015-10-29 Robert J. Logan Method to Prevent Harm to Athletes from Overexertion
WO2016123705A1 (en) 2015-02-02 2016-08-11 Novadaq Technologies Inc. Methods and systems for characterizing tissue of a subject
US9451882B2 (en) 2009-12-15 2016-09-27 Emory University Integrated system and methods for real-time anatomical guidance in a diagnostic or therapeutic procedure
US20190125902A1 (en) 2017-10-27 2019-05-02 Medibeacon Inc. Methods for renal function determination

Family Cites Families (29)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
DE19628002C1 (en) * 1996-07-11 1997-12-18 Inst Chemo Biosensorik Device and method for carrying out fluorescence immunoassays
JP2001321363A (en) * 2000-05-16 2001-11-20 Nippon Koden Corp Organism parameter measuring device
US6697652B2 (en) * 2001-01-19 2004-02-24 Massachusetts Institute Of Technology Fluorescence, reflectance and light scattering spectroscopy for measuring tissue
US7762964B2 (en) * 2001-12-10 2010-07-27 Candela Corporation Method and apparatus for improving safety during exposure to a monochromatic light source
WO2003051191A1 (en) * 2001-12-17 2003-06-26 Danfoss A/S Method and device for monitoring analyte concentration by optical detection
CN102499620A (en) 2004-04-14 2012-06-20 Led医学诊断有限公司 System and method for dectecting oral diseases, and environment light management system
ES2413757T3 (en) * 2005-04-19 2013-07-17 Indiana University Research And Technology Corporation Procedure for the analysis of renal function
US20070093698A1 (en) * 2005-10-20 2007-04-26 Glucon Inc. Apparatus and methods for attaching a device to a body
BRPI0617782A2 (en) * 2005-10-24 2011-08-09 Marcio Marc Abreu apparatus and method for measuring biological parameters
KR100853655B1 (en) 2006-12-15 2008-08-25 한국전기연구원 Apparatus, light source system and method for photo-diagnosis and phototherapy of skin disease
CN102065904A (en) * 2008-04-18 2011-05-18 药物影像股份有限公司 Renal function analysis method and apparatus
BRPI0908612A2 (en) * 2008-05-14 2020-08-18 Novadaq Technologies Inc. composition, vaccine, method for producing a composition, method for reducing the risk of iatrogenic injury and method for diagnosing a nerve condition
CA2724973C (en) * 2008-05-20 2015-08-11 University Health Network Device and method for fluorescence-based imaging and monitoring
BR112012017166A2 (en) 2009-12-23 2016-03-15 Delta Dansk Elektronik Lys Og Akustik monitoring device
FR2957599B1 (en) * 2010-03-18 2014-01-10 Commissariat Energie Atomique PROCESS FOR THE DEPOLYMERIZATION OF LIGNOCELLULOSIC BIOMASS
US8818733B2 (en) * 2010-04-20 2014-08-26 Mayo Foundation For Medical Education And Research Determination of photodynamic therapy (PDT) treatment parameters
CA2745796C (en) * 2010-07-09 2018-11-06 Niculae Mincu Method and system for collecting optical data for use in time resolved optical imaging of a turbid media
US20130289414A1 (en) * 2012-03-09 2013-10-31 Mahmoudreza Adibnazari Combined absorption-reflection based instrument and technique to measure antioxidants (including carotenoids) in human tissue
KR101454298B1 (en) 2013-01-29 2014-10-27 한국전기연구원 A pyramidal skin autofluorescence measurement apparatus for detecting reflected light
US9955871B2 (en) * 2012-03-21 2018-05-01 Korea Electrotechnology Research Institute Transmitted light detection type measurement apparatus for skin autofluorescence
US9155473B2 (en) 2012-03-21 2015-10-13 Korea Electrotechnology Research Institute Reflection detection type measurement apparatus for skin autofluorescence
DE102012018076B4 (en) * 2012-09-13 2014-06-12 Lohmann Gmbh & Co. Kg Adhesive functional strip for transcutaneous fluorescence measurement and related manufacturing processes and uses
CN108013881B (en) * 2013-03-14 2021-06-15 普罗菲尤萨股份有限公司 Method and apparatus for correcting optical signals
US20150201840A1 (en) * 2013-03-18 2015-07-23 Korea Electrotechnology Research Institute Reflection detection type measurement apparatus for skin autofluorescence
JP6502630B2 (en) * 2013-09-30 2019-04-17 株式会社リコー Optical sensor, optical inspection apparatus, and optical characteristic detection method
ES2723892T3 (en) * 2013-10-22 2019-09-03 Medibeacon Inc Improved measurement of transcutaneous organ function
EP3120122B1 (en) * 2014-03-21 2019-11-13 HyperMed Imaging, Inc. Compact light sensor
WO2016055260A1 (en) * 2014-10-09 2016-04-14 Koninklijke Philips N.V. Optical vital signs sensor.
JP2016112375A (en) 2014-12-16 2016-06-23 イオム株式会社 Dermofluorometer

Patent Citations (57)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5403928A (en) 1990-05-15 1995-04-04 Diatron Corporation Fluorescent marker components and fluorescent probes
US5584296A (en) 1992-12-01 1996-12-17 Somanetics Corporation Patient sensor for optical cerebral oximeters and the like
US5847395A (en) * 1996-10-23 1998-12-08 Siemens Medical Systems Adaptive baseline correction for gamma camera
US6689616B1 (en) 1997-12-17 2004-02-10 Roche Diagnostics Gmbh Dye-polysaccharide conjugates and their use as a diagnostic agent
US6720572B1 (en) 1999-06-25 2004-04-13 The Penn State Research Foundation Organic light emitters with improved carrier injection
US6995019B2 (en) 2000-05-11 2006-02-07 Roche Diagnostics Operations, Inc. Fluorescent isothiocyanate (fitc) sinistrin, its production and use
US20040022730A1 (en) 2000-05-11 2004-02-05 Heinz-Michael Hein Fluorescent isothiocyanate (fitc) sinistrin, its production and use
US20040065806A1 (en) 2000-11-22 2004-04-08 Donal Bradley Detection system
US20030215391A1 (en) 2001-07-19 2003-11-20 Carlos Rabito Fluorescent agents for real-time measurement of organ function
US6619838B2 (en) 2001-08-22 2003-09-16 Scimed Life Systems, Inc. Two-piece sensor assembly
US20030236452A1 (en) 2002-06-20 2003-12-25 Richard Melker Novel non-invasive perfusion monitor and system, specially configured oximeter probes, methods of using same, and covers for probes
US20040210280A1 (en) 2002-10-25 2004-10-21 Bionics Pharma Gmbh Plaster-type chip systems for thermodynamic control of topical dermal and transdermal systems
US20040197267A1 (en) 2003-02-19 2004-10-07 Black Robert D. In vivo fluorescence sensors, systems, and related methods operating in conjunction with fluorescent analytes
US7510699B2 (en) 2003-02-19 2009-03-31 Sicel Technologies, Inc. In vivo fluorescence sensors, systems, and related methods operating in conjunction with fluorescent analytes
US20080281173A1 (en) 2003-04-24 2008-11-13 The Board Of Regents Of The University Of Texas System Noninvasive blood analysis by optical probing of the veins under the tongue
US7050175B1 (en) 2003-08-08 2006-05-23 Carl Zeiss Smt Ag Method for calibrating an interferometer apparatus, for qualifying an optical surface, and for manufacturing a substrate having an optical surface
US20060095102A1 (en) 2003-09-17 2006-05-04 Thomas Perez Method and apparatus for sublingual application of light to blood
US20050137459A1 (en) 2003-12-17 2005-06-23 Scimed Life Systems, Inc. Medical device with OLED illumination light source
US20060020216A1 (en) 2004-07-20 2006-01-26 Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha Medical information detection apparatus and health management system using the medical information detection apparatus
US20070218563A1 (en) 2004-09-21 2007-09-20 Roche Diagnostics Operations, Inc. Stiochiometrically defined dye-labelled substances for measuring glomerular filtration rate, the production thereof and their use
US20070237678A1 (en) 2004-10-07 2007-10-11 Bernd Roesicke Analytical Test Element With Wireless Data Transmission
US20060118742A1 (en) 2004-12-06 2006-06-08 Richard Levenson Systems and methods for in-vivo optical imaging and measurement
WO2006063246A1 (en) 2004-12-08 2006-06-15 The General Hospital Corporation System and method for normalized fluorescence or bioluminescence imaging
US9376399B2 (en) 2004-12-23 2016-06-28 Medibeacon Llc Fluorescent pyrazine derivatives and methods of using the same in assessing renal function
US9114160B2 (en) 2004-12-23 2015-08-25 Medibeacon, LLC Pyrazine derivatives and uses thereof in renal monitoring
US9480687B2 (en) 2004-12-23 2016-11-01 Medibeacon, Inc. Pyrazine derivatives and uses thereof in renal monitoring
US8778309B2 (en) 2004-12-23 2014-07-15 Medibeacon Llc Fluorescent pyrazine derivatives and methods of using the same in assessing renal function
US8722685B2 (en) 2004-12-23 2014-05-13 Medibeacon, LLC Pyrazine derivatives and uses thereof in renal monitoring
US8664392B2 (en) 2004-12-23 2014-03-04 Medibeacon, LLC Pyrazine derivatives for bioconjugation
EP1707114A1 (en) 2005-03-30 2006-10-04 Lifescan, Inc. Fluorescence measurement analytical kit
US20090066934A1 (en) 2005-07-14 2009-03-12 Johnway Gao Optical devices for biological and chemical detection
US20070038046A1 (en) 2005-08-09 2007-02-15 Hayter Paul G Kinematic fluorescence measurement band
EP1752085A2 (en) 2005-08-09 2007-02-14 Lifescan, Inc. Kinematic adhesive fluorescence measurement patch
US20080312539A1 (en) 2006-02-24 2008-12-18 Dorshow Richard B Methods of Using Optical Agents
US9283288B2 (en) 2006-02-24 2016-03-15 Medibeacon, Inc. Methods of using optical agents
US8115000B2 (en) 2006-06-22 2012-02-14 Mallinckrodt Llc Pyrazine derivatives and uses thereof in renal monitoring
US20080082004A1 (en) 2006-09-08 2008-04-03 Triage Wireless, Inc. Blood pressure monitor
WO2009005748A1 (en) 2007-06-29 2009-01-08 The Trustees Of Columbia University In The City Ofnew York Optical imaging or spectroscopy systems and methods
US20110049384A1 (en) 2007-10-19 2011-03-03 Yared Wael I Imaging Systems Featuring Waveguiding Compensation
US20170112425A1 (en) 2008-08-22 2017-04-27 Norbert Gretz Transcutaneous organ function measurement
US20110230739A1 (en) 2008-08-22 2011-09-22 Norbert Gretz Transcutaneous organ function measurement
WO2010020673A2 (en) 2008-08-22 2010-02-25 Basf Se Transcutaneous organ function measurement
US9005581B2 (en) 2008-12-17 2015-04-14 Medibeacon, LLC Modified pyrazine derivatives and uses thereof
US8697033B2 (en) 2008-12-17 2014-04-15 Medibeacon, LLC Modified pyrazine derivatives and uses thereof
US20100240983A1 (en) 2009-03-19 2010-09-23 Youngkyoo Jung Multi-phase pseudo-continuous arterial spin labeling
US9451882B2 (en) 2009-12-15 2016-09-27 Emory University Integrated system and methods for real-time anatomical guidance in a diagnostic or therapeutic procedure
WO2011089258A2 (en) 2010-01-25 2011-07-28 Imec A variability-aware reliability simulation method of electronic systems
US20130006116A1 (en) * 2010-01-25 2013-01-03 University Health Network System and method for sub-surface fluorescence imaging
US20120128264A1 (en) 2010-11-23 2012-05-24 General Electric Company Methods and systems of optical imaging for target detection in a scattering medium
US20150306486A1 (en) 2010-12-30 2015-10-29 Robert J. Logan Method to Prevent Harm to Athletes from Overexertion
US20130116512A1 (en) 2011-04-26 2013-05-09 Mir Imran Mouthpiece for measurement of biometric data of a diver and underwater communication
US20130109963A1 (en) 2011-10-31 2013-05-02 The University Of Connecticut Method and apparatus for medical imaging using combined near-infrared optical tomography, fluorescent tomography and ultrasound
WO2014062716A1 (en) 2012-10-15 2014-04-24 Visen Medical, Inc. Systems, methods, and apparatus for imaging of diffuse media featuring cross-modality weighting of fluorescent and bioluminescent sources
US20140121539A1 (en) 2012-10-29 2014-05-01 Microsoft Corporation Wearable personal information system
US20140249853A1 (en) 2013-03-04 2014-09-04 Hello Inc. Monitoring System and Device with Sensors and User Profiles Based on Biometric User Information
WO2016123705A1 (en) 2015-02-02 2016-08-11 Novadaq Technologies Inc. Methods and systems for characterizing tissue of a subject
US20190125902A1 (en) 2017-10-27 2019-05-02 Medibeacon Inc. Methods for renal function determination

Non-Patent Citations (57)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
Acurable; We Create Accurate and User Friendly Wearable Medical Devices Intended to be Used by Patients at Home; product page; 8 pgs; retrieved Sep. 16, 2020 from the Internet: https://acurable.com/.
Apple; Apple Watch Series 5—Technical Specifications; product page; 3 pgs; retrieved Sep. 15, 2020 from the Internet: https://support.apple.com/kb/SP808?viewlocale=en_US&locale=en_US.
Ava; The Ava Bracelet; product p.; 5 pgs; retrieved Sep. 16, 2020 from the Internet: https://www.avawomen.com/how-ava-works/healthcare/technology/.
AWAK; AWAK product page; 5 pgs; retrieved Sep. 16, 2020 from the Internet: https://awak.com/product/.
BEDDR; Tune your Sleep with the SleepTuner; product page; 20 pgs; retrieved Sep. 16, 2020 from the Internet: https://www.beddrsleep.com/sleeptuner.
Berge et al., "Pharmaceutical Salts", Journal of Pharmaceutical Sciences, Jan. 1977, vol. 66, No. 1, pp. 1-19.
BioIntellisense; New! BioButton COVID-19 Screening Solution; product page; 12 pgs; retroeved Sep. 16, 2020 from the Internet: https://biointellisense.com/biobutton.
Biovotion; Everion—Revealing Medical Grade Data You Can Act On; 3 pgs; retrieved Sep. 16, 2020 from the Internet: https://www.biovotion.com/everion/.
Bradley, R.S. et al., "A review of attenuation correction techniques for tissue fluorescence", J.R. Soc. Interface, 2006, vol. 3, pp. 1-13.
Brenner et al., "Quantitative Importance of Changes in Postglomerular Colloid Osmotic Pressure in Mediating Glomerulotubular Balance in the Rat," The Journal of Clinical Investigation, vol. 52, (1973), pp. 190-197.
Chinen et al., "Fluorescence-Enhanced Europium-Diethylenetriaminepentaacetic (DTPA)-Monoamide Complexes for the Assessment of Renal Function," J. Med. Chem., vol. 51, (2008), pp. 957-962.
Dean et al., "Inulin, Diodone, Creatinine and Urea Clearances in Newborn Infants," J. Physiol., vol. 106, (1947), pp. 431-439.
Debreczeny et al., "Transdermal optical renal function monitoring in humans: development, verification, and validation of a prototype device", J. Biomed. Opt, 2018, vol. 23, No. 5, pp. 057003-1-057003-9.
Dexcom; Dexcom Continuous Glucose Monitoring; product page; 10 pgs; retrieved Sep. 15, 2020 from the Internet: https://www.dexcom.com/g6/features-and-benefits.
Eccrine; Eccrine Systems, Inc. Sweatronics; product page; 4 pgs; retrieved Sep. 16, 2020 from the Internet: https://www.eccrinesystems.com/technology.
ESight; Meet eSight 4; product page; 11 pgs; retrieved Sep. 16, 2020 from the Internet: https://esighteyewear.com/low-vision-device-for-visually-impaired/.
Flextrapower; Smart Insole; product home page. 4 pgs; retrieved Sep. 15, 2020 from the Internet: https://www.flextrapower.com/products/#insole.
Frennby et al., "Contrast Media as Markers of GFR", 2002, European Radiology, Published May 16, 2001, vol. 12, No. 2, pp. 475-484.
Friedemann, "Development of a Pharmokinetic Model to Describe the Distribution and Excretion Kinetics of a Renal Marker Using Transcutaneously Obtained Data in Rats", Dissertation from University Heidelberg, Published 2014, 112 pages.
Friedman et al., "A comparison of the renal clearances of allantoin and inulin in man," Fed. Proc., vol. 7, No. 1 Pt 1, (1948), 1 page.
Gregory et al., "Studies on Hypertension; Effect of Lowering the Blood Pressures of Hypertensive Patients by High Spinal Anesthesia on the Renal Function as Measured by Inulin and Diodrast Clearances," Arch. Intern. Med. (Chic), vol. 77, (1946), pp. 385-392.
Hull, E.L. et al., "Noninvasive, optical detection of diabetes: model studies with porcine skin", Optics Express, Sep. 20, 2004, vol. 12, No. 19, pp. 4496-4510.
International Preliminary Report on Patentability received for PCT Patent Application No. PCT/US2019/013784, dated Jul. 30, 2020, 8 pages.
International Search Report and Written Opinion issued in PCT/US2018/016041, dated Mar. 29, 2018, 9 pgs.
International Search Report for International Application No. PCT/US2019/048319, dated Nov. 20, 2019, 16 pages.
International Search Report received for PCT Patent Application No. PCT/US2019/013784, dated May 7, 2019, 6 pages.
Levin et al., "The Effect of Chronic Anemia on Renal Function as Measured by Inulin and Diodrast Clearances," Proc. Annu. Meet. Cent. Soc. Clin. Res. U. S., vol. 20, (1947), 3 pages.
Matrix; PowerWatch; product page; 5 pgs; retrieved Sep. 15, 2020 from the Internet: https://www.powerwatch.com/products/powerwatch-2.
Medcomp; products Dignity CT Ports; product page; 1 pg; retrieved Sep. 15, 2020 from the Internet: http://www.medcompnet.com/products/ports/dignity_ct_ports.html.
Medtronic; InterStim II System; product page; 5 pgs; retrieved Sep. 15, 2020 from the Internet: https://www.medtronic.com/us-en/healthcare-professionals/products/urology/sacral-neuromodulation-systems/interstim-ii.html.
Medtronic; LINQ II; product page; 9 pgs; retrieved Sep. 15, 2020 from the Internet: https://www.medtronic.com/us-en/healthcare-professionals/products/cardiac-rhythm/cardiac-monitors/linq-ii.html.
Nagpal et al., "Combined Fluorescein, Indocyanine angiography and Optical Coherent Tomography Using Spectralis," Rajasthan Journal of Ophthalmology, (2011), 8 pages.
Navar et al., "Distal Tubular Feedback in the Autoregulation of Single Nephron Glomerular Filtration Rate," J. Clin. Invest., vol. 53, (1974), pp. 516-525.
Negre-Salvayre et al., "Hydrolysis of Fluorescent Pyrene-Acyl Esters by Human Pancreatic Carboxylic Ester Hydrolase and Bile Salt-Stimulated Lipase", LIPIDS, 1990, vol. 25, No. 8, pp. 428-434.
Nicholson et al., "Renal Function as Affected by Experimental Unilateral Kidney Lesions : I. Nephrosis Due to Sodium Rartrate," J. Exp. Med., vol. 68, (1938), pp. 439-456.
Pais et al.,"High-Sensitivity, disposable lab-on-a-chip with thin-film organic electronics for fluorescence detection", The Royal Society of Chemistry, 2008, pp. 794-800.
Pharsight, "WinNonlin User's Guide", Version 5.3, Pharsight Corporation, 710 pages.
Philips; Biointellisense Biosticker; product page; 8 pgs; retrieved Sep. 16, 2020 from the Internet: https://www.usa.philips.com/healthcare/services/population-health-management/patient-engagement/biointellisense-biosticker.
Pill et al., "Direct fluorometric analysis of a newly synthesized fluorescein-labelled marker for glomerular filtration rate", Anal. Bioanal. Chem., 2005, vol. 382, pp. 59-64.
Pill et al., "Fluorescein-labeled sinistrin as marker of glomerular filtration rate", European Journ. of Medicinal Chemistry, 2005, vol. 40, pp. 1056-1061.
Poujeol et al., "Glomerular Filtration Rate and Microsphere Distributions in Single Nephron of Rat Kidney," Pflugers Arch., vol. 357, (1975), pp. 291-301.
Proteus; Proteus Digital Health; product page; 4 pgs; retrieved Sep. 16, 2020 from the Internet: https://www.proteus.com/.
Qi et al., "Serial determination of glomerular filtration rate in consciences mice using FITC-inulin clearance", Am. J. Physiol Renal Physiol, vol. 286, 2004, pp. F590-F596.
Robson et al., "The Determination of the Renal Clearance of Inulin in Man," Q. J. Exp. Physiol., vol. 35, (1949), pp. 111-134.
Samuel, "Light fantastic", Materials World, 2007, pp. 28-30.
Schock-Kusch et al., "Transcutaneous measurement of glomerular filtration rate using FITC-sinistrin in rats," Nephrol Dial Transplant, vol. 24, (2009), pp. 2997-3001.
Scholze et al., "Fluorescent Inhibitors for the Qualitative and Quantitative Analysis of Lipolytic Enzymes", Analytical Biochemistry, 1999, vol. 276, pp. 72-80.
Shannon et al., "The Renal Excretion of Inulin and Creatinine by the Anaesthetized Dog and the Pump-Lung-Kidney Preparation", J. Physiol., vol. 98, (1940), pp. 97-108.
Sony; mSafety Technical Specifications; product page; 6 pgs; retrieved Sep. 16, 2020 from the Internet: https://iot.sonynetworkcom.com/msafety/technology.
Supplemental European Search Report for EP 18 74 4928, dated Oct. 4, 2020, 14 pages.
Vivalnk; Fever Scout; product page; 7 pgs; retrieved Sep. 16, 2020 from the Internet: https://www.vivalnk.com/feverscout.
Vivalnk; Medical Sensor Platform; product page; 5 pgs; retrieved Sep. 16, 2020 from the Internet: https://www.vivalnk.com/product/platform.
Vivalnk; Wellness Quantified Vital Scout; product page; 6 pgs; retrieved Sep. 16, 2020 from the Internet: https://www.vivalnk.com/vitalscout.
Withings; Hybrid Smartwatches; product home page; 13 pgs; retrieved Sep. 16, 2020 from the Internet: https://www.withings.com/us/en/watches.
Yu et al., "Rapid determination of renal filtration function using an optical ratiometric imaging approach", Am J Physiol, 2007, vol. 292, pp. F1873-F1880.
Zimmer Biomet; mymobility; product page; 9 pgs; retrieved Sep. 15, 2020 from the Internet: https://www.zimmerbiomet.com/medical-professionals/zb-connect/mymobility.html.
Zonios, G. et al., "Diffuse reflectance spectroscopy of human adenomatous colon polyps in vivo", Applied Optics, Nov. 1, 1999, vol. 38, No. 31, pp. 6628-6637.

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
PH12019501749A1 (en) 2020-06-01
CN112932413A (en) 2021-06-11
MX2019009040A (en) 2019-11-11
SG10202108183SA (en) 2021-09-29
ZA201904973B (en) 2020-05-27
IL268335B1 (en) 2023-03-01
JP7263425B2 (en) 2023-04-24
WO2018140978A1 (en) 2018-08-02
NZ755765A (en) 2021-03-26
US11950907B2 (en) 2024-04-09
KR20210118253A (en) 2021-09-29
IL300236B2 (en) 2024-04-01
MX2023002896A (en) 2023-04-05
US10952656B2 (en) 2021-03-23
KR102306048B1 (en) 2021-09-29
CA3203465A1 (en) 2018-08-02
CN110520035B (en) 2023-03-10
JP2021106888A (en) 2021-07-29
BR112019015520A2 (en) 2020-03-17
CN115120241A (en) 2022-09-30
IL300236B1 (en) 2023-12-01
US20180214057A1 (en) 2018-08-02
RU2721652C1 (en) 2020-05-21
JP6861288B2 (en) 2021-04-21
US20200383617A1 (en) 2020-12-10
KR102429632B1 (en) 2022-08-05
AU2018213422A1 (en) 2019-09-19
EP3573518A1 (en) 2019-12-04
US20200138352A1 (en) 2020-05-07
IL268335A (en) 2019-09-26
US20210219883A1 (en) 2021-07-22
US20240237928A1 (en) 2024-07-18
KR20190107720A (en) 2019-09-20
CA3051963A1 (en) 2018-08-02
EP3573518A4 (en) 2020-11-04
SG11201906938WA (en) 2019-08-27
IL268335B2 (en) 2023-07-01
US11478172B2 (en) 2022-10-25
CN110520035A (en) 2019-11-29
AU2018213422B2 (en) 2020-02-06
JP2020506764A (en) 2020-03-05
US10548521B2 (en) 2020-02-04
US20230021174A1 (en) 2023-01-19
IL300236A (en) 2023-03-01

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US11950907B2 (en) Method for non-invasive monitoring of fluorescent tracer agent with diffuse reflecting medium with time-varying optical properties
US10194854B2 (en) Method for non-invasive monitoring of fluorescent tracer agent with background separation corrections
NZ755765B2 (en) Method for non-invasive monitoring of fluorescent tracer agent with diffuse reflection corrections
NZ755760B2 (en) Method for non-invasive monitoring of fluorescent tracer agent with background separation corrections

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
FEPP Fee payment procedure

Free format text: ENTITY STATUS SET TO UNDISCOUNTED (ORIGINAL EVENT CODE: BIG.); ENTITY STATUS OF PATENT OWNER: SMALL ENTITY

FEPP Fee payment procedure

Free format text: ENTITY STATUS SET TO SMALL (ORIGINAL EVENT CODE: SMAL); ENTITY STATUS OF PATENT OWNER: SMALL ENTITY

FEPP Fee payment procedure

Free format text: PETITION RELATED TO MAINTENANCE FEES GRANTED (ORIGINAL EVENT CODE: PTGR); ENTITY STATUS OF PATENT OWNER: SMALL ENTITY

STPP Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text: RESPONSE TO EX PARTE QUAYLE ACTION ENTERED AND FORWARDED TO EXAMINER

STPP Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text: NOTICE OF ALLOWANCE MAILED -- APPLICATION RECEIVED IN OFFICE OF PUBLICATIONS

AS Assignment

Owner name: MEDIBEACON INC., MISSOURI

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:SHULTZ, KIMBERLY;KEATING, JENNIFER;SOLOMON, EDWARD;AND OTHERS;SIGNING DATES FROM 20171012 TO 20171016;REEL/FRAME:054630/0335

STPP Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text: NOTICE OF ALLOWANCE MAILED -- APPLICATION RECEIVED IN OFFICE OF PUBLICATIONS

STPP Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text: PUBLICATIONS -- ISSUE FEE PAYMENT RECEIVED

STPP Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text: PUBLICATIONS -- ISSUE FEE PAYMENT VERIFIED

STCF Information on status: patent grant

Free format text: PATENTED CASE